Volvo Xc90 Users Manual

2011 XC90 Owner's Manual 2011-Volvo-XC90-Owners-Manual 2011 Volvo XC90 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

XC90 to the manual 6290425e-4875-4c82-ba1c-8427fcb11f78

2015-01-26

: Volvo Volvo-Xc90-Users-Manual-233605 volvo-xc90-users-manual-233605 volvo pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 302 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

VOLVO XC90

Owner's Manual Web Edition

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you

will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile

designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you

to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating

instructions in this manual.

We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times

in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a

vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impair-

ment that could hinder your ability to drive.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and

emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle,

please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Contacting

Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction" chapter for information on get-

ting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.

Contents

4* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

00 Introduction

Important information............................... 10

Environment.............................................. 14

Important warnings................................... 15

01 Safety

Occupant safety........................................ 18

Seat belts.................................................. 20

Supplemental Restraint System............... 23

Front airbags............................................. 24

Occupant Weight Sensor.......................... 28

Side impact protection airbags................. 31

Inflatable Curtain....................................... 33

Whiplash Protection System..................... 35

Child safety............................................... 37

Child restraint systems............................. 39

Infant seats............................................... 41

Convertible seats...................................... 43

Booster cushions...................................... 46

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................. 47

Top tether anchors.................................... 49

Child restraint registration and recalls...... 50

Integrated booster cushion....................... 51

02 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview.................................. 56

Instrument panel....................................... 58

Information display................................... 62

Center console buttons............................ 64

Steering wheel adjustment....................... 66

Lighting panel........................................... 67

Manually unlocking the fuel filler door...... 69

Left-side steering wheel lever................... 70

Right-side steering wheel lever................. 71

Hazard warning flashers........................... 74

Trip computer........................................... 75

Cruise control............................................ 77

12-volt sockets......................................... 79

Hood/tailgate............................................ 80

Power windows......................................... 81

Mirrors....................................................... 83

Power moonroof....................................... 86

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*..... 88

Contents

03 Climate

Climate control system – general informa-

tion............................................................ 94

Air distribution........................................... 96

Electronic climate control (ECC)............... 98

04 Interior

Front seats.............................................. 104

Rear seats............................................... 108

Interior lighting........................................ 111

Storage compartments........................... 113

Securing cargo........................................ 118

05 Locks and alarm

Remote keys and key blades.................. 124

Locking and unlocking............................ 128

Child safety locks.................................... 130

Alarm....................................................... 131

Contents

6* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Starting and driving

General information................................ 134

Fuel requirements................................... 135

Refueling................................................. 137

Starting the vehicle................................. 139

Ignition switch and steering wheel lock. . 141

Economical driving.................................. 142

Difficult driving conditions...................... 143

Automatic transmission.......................... 144

Jump starting.......................................... 147

All Wheel Drive*....................................... 148

Brake system.......................................... 149

Parking brake.......................................... 151

Stability system....................................... 152

Front/rear park assist*............................. 154

Towing.................................................... 156

Towing a trailer....................................... 158

Detachable trailer hitch........................... 161

Load carriers (accessory)........................ 162

Cold weather precautions....................... 163

Before a long distance trip...................... 164

Blind Spot Information System*.............. 165

07 Wheels and tires

General information................................ 172

Tire inflation ............................................ 175

Tire inflation pressure tables – U.S. mod-

els............................................................ 177

Tire inflation pressure tables – Canadian

models.................................................... 178

Tire designations..................................... 179

Glossary of tire terminology.................... 181

Vehicle loading........................................ 182

Uniform Tire Quality Grading.................. 183

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires. . 184

Temporary spare..................................... 185

Tire Sealing System ............................... 186

Changing wheels.................................... 191

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 195

08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the vehicle.......... 200

Paint touch up......................................... 204

Contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7

09 Maintenance and servicing

Volvo service........................................... 208

Maintaining your vehicle......................... 209

Working on your vehicle......................... 211

Engine compartment............................... 213

Engine oil................................................ 214

Fluids...................................................... 217

Wiper blades........................................... 219

Battery..................................................... 220

Replacing bulbs...................................... 223

Fuses...................................................... 230

10 Audio

Audio system overview........................... 244

Audio system controls............................ 245

Radio functions....................................... 250

Sirius satellite radio................................. 255

Auxiliary equipment................................ 259

CD player/changer.................................. 261

Menu structure........................................ 264

Bluetooth® hands-free connection......... 265

Rear Seat Entertainment – Dual Screen

(RSE)*...................................................... 270

11 Specifications

Label information.................................... 276

Dimensions ............................................ 278

Weights .................................................. 280

Fluids...................................................... 282

Suspension............................................. 284

Engine oil................................................ 285

Engine specifications.............................. 286

Electrical system..................................... 287

Three-way catalytic converter................. 289

Overview of information and warning sym-

bols ........................................................ 290

Volvo programs....................................... 292

Contents

12 Index

Index....................................................... 294

Contents

Introduction

Important information

Contacting Volvo

In the USA:

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive,

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada:

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocanada.com

About this manual

•Before you operate your vehicle for the first

time, please familiarize yourself with the

information found in the chapters "Instru-

ments and controls" and "Starting and

driving."

•Information contained in the balance of the

manual is extremely useful and should be

read after operating the vehicle for the first

time.

•The manual is structured so that it can be

used for reference. For this reason, it

should be kept in the vehicle for ready

access.

Footnotes

Certain pages of this manual contain informa-

tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of

the page. This information supplements the

text that the footnote number refers to (a letter

is used if the footnote refers to text in a table).

Display texts

There are several displays in the driver’s field

of vision that show messages generated by

various systems and functions in the vehicle.

These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Man-

ual by being in slightly larger type than the sur-

rounding text and are printed in gray, (for

example: Doors automatic lock).

Decals

There are various types of decals in the vehicle

whose purpose is to provide important infor-

mation in a clear and concise way. The impor-

tance of these decals is explained as follows,

in descending order of importance.

Risk of injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back-

ground, white text/image on a black back-

ground. Decals of this type are used to indicate

potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this

type could result in serious injury or death.

Introduction

Important information

Risk of damage to the vehicle

G031592

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black or blue warning background and space

for a message. If the information on decals of

this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle

could result.

Information

G031593

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black background. These decals provide gen-

eral information.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual

are examples only and are not intended to

be reproductions of the decals actually used

in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indi-

cation of how they look and their approxi-

mate location in the vehicle. The applicable

information for your particular vehicle can

be found on the respective decals in the

vehicle.

Types of lists used in the manual

Procedures

Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or

actions that must be carried out in a certain

order, are arranged in numbered lists in this

manual.

If there is a series of illustrations associated

with step-by-step instructions, each step

in the procedure is numbered in the same

way as the corresponding illustration.

Lists in which letters are used can be found

with series of illustrations in cases where

the order in which the instructions are car-

ried out is not important.

Arrows with or without numbers are used

to indicate the direction of a movement.

If there are no illustrations associated with a

step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure

are indicated by ordinary numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are used

in general overview illustrations in which

certain components are pointed out. The

corresponding number is also used in the

position list's description of the various

components.

Introduction

Important information

Bullet lists

Bullets are used to differentiate a number of

components/functions/points of information

that can be listed in random order.

For example:

•Coolant

•Engine oil

Continued

This symbol can be found at the lower right

corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page

to indicate that the current topic is continued

on the following page.

Options and accessories

Optional or accessory equipment described in

this manual is indicated by an asterisk.

Optional or accessory equipment may not be

available in all countries or markets. Please

note that some vehicles may be equipped dif-

ferently, depending on special legal require-

ments.

Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor-

mation.

NOTE

•All information, illustrations and specifi-

cations contained in this manual are

based on the latest product information

available at the time of publication.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

changes at any time, or to change spec-

ifications or design without notice and

without incurring obligation.

•Do not export your Volvo to another

country before investigating that coun-

try's applicable safety and emission

control requirements. In some cases it

may be difficult or impossible to comply

with these requirements. Modifications

to the emission control system(s) may

render your Volvo not certifiable for

legal operation in the U.S., Canada and

other countries.

WARNING

If your vehicle is involved in an accident,

unseen damage may affect its drivability

and safety.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA proposition 65

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the state of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addition, certain

fluids contained in vehicles and certain

products of component wear contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such as

air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,

adaptive steering columns, and button cell

batteries may contain Perchlorate material.

Special handling may apply for service or

vehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.

Introduction

Important information

Shiftlock

When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector

is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the

selector from this position, turn the ignition key

to position II (or start the engine), depress the

brake pedal, press the button on the front side

of the gear selector and move the selector from

P (Park).

Keylock

When you switch off the ignition, the gear

selector must be in the P (Park) position before

the key can be removed from the ignition

switch.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS system in your vehicle performs a

self-diagnostic test when the vehicle first rea-

ches the speed of approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several

times and a sound may be audible from the

ABS control module. This is normal.

Fuel filler door

Press the button on the light switch panel (see

the illustration on page 67) when the vehicle

is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door.

Please note that the fuel filler door will remain

unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for-

ward. An audible click will be heard when the

fuel filler door relocks.

Fuel filler cap

The fuel filler door, located on the right rear

quarter panel, is connected to your vehicle's

central locking system.

Points to keep in mind

•Do not export your Volvo to another coun-

try before investigating that country's

applicable safety and exhaust emission

requirements. In some cases it may be dif-

ficult or impossible to comply with these

requirements. Modifications to the emis-

sion control system(s) may render your

Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in

the U.S., Canada and other countries.

•All information, illustrations and specifica-

tions contained in this manual are based on

the latest product information available at

the time of publication. Please note that

some vehicles may be equipped differ-

ently, depending on special legal require-

ments. Optional equipment described in

this manual may not be available in all mar-

kets.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

changes at any time, or to change specifi-

cations or design without notice and with-

out incurring obligation.

Vehicle event data (Black box)

Your vehicle's driving and safety systems

employ computers that monitor, and share

with each other, information about your vehi-

cle's operation. One or more of these comput-

ers may store what they monitor, either during

normal vehicle operation or in a crash or near-

crash event. Stored information may be read

and used by:

•Volvo Car Corporation

•service and repair facilities

•law enforcement or government agencies

•others who may assert a legal right to

know, or who obtain your consent to know

such information.

Introduction

Environment

Volvo and the environment

Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus-

tomers. As a natural part of this commitment,

we care about the environment in which we all

live. Caring for the environment means an

everyday involvement in reducing our environ-

mental impact. Volvo's environmental activities

are based on a holistic view, which means we

consider the overall environmental impact of a

product throughout its complete life cycle. In

this context, design, production, product use,

and recycling are all important considerations.

In production, Volvo has partly or completely

phased out several chemicals including CFCs,

lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and

reduced the number of chemicals used in our

plants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into

production a three-way catalytic converter with

a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen

sensor, in 1976. The current version of this

highly efficient system reduces emissions of

harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the

exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and

the search to eliminate the remaining emis-

sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile

manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for

the air conditioning system of all models as far

back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec-

tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are

bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

continuous environmental refinement of con-

ventional gasoline-powered internal combus-

tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at

advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become our part-

ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on

the environment. To reduce your vehicle's

environmental impact, you can:

•Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.

Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-

omy with improperly inflated tires.

•Follow the recommended maintenance

schedule in your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet.

•Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-

sible.

•See a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician as soon as possible for inspec-

tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-

cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the

vehicle has started.

•Properly dispose of any vehicle-related

waste such as used motor oil, used batter-

ies, brake pads, etc.

•When cleaning your vehicle, please use

genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo

car care products are formulated to be

environmentally friendly.

Recycling

As part of Volvo’s commitment to the environ-

ment, it is essential for the vehicle to be recy-

cled in an environmentally sound way. Almost

the entire vehicle can be recycled and for that

reason, the vehicle’s final owner is requested

to contact a Volvo retailer for information about

approved and certified recycling facilities.

Introduction

Important warnings

Driver distraction

A driver has a responsibility to do everything

possible to ensure his or her own safety and

the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth-

ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions

is part of that responsibility.

Driver distraction results from driver activities

that are not directly related to controlling the

vehicle in the driving environment. Your new

Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea-

ture-rich entertainment and communication

systems. These include hands-free cellular tel-

ephones, navigation systems, and multipur-

pose audio systems. You may also own other

portable electronic devices for your own con-

venience. When used properly and safely, they

enrich the driving experience. Improperly used,

any of these could cause a distraction.

For all of these systems, we want to provide the

following warning that reflects the strong Volvo

concern for your safety. Never use these devi-

ces or any feature of your vehicle in a way that

distracts you from the task of driving safely.

Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In

addition to this general warning, we offer the

following guidance regarding specific newer

features that may be found in your vehicle

•Never use a hand-held cellular telephone

while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

cellular telephone use by a driver while the

vehicle is moving.

•If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-

tion system, set and make changes to your

travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.

•Never program your audio system while

the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-

sets with the vehicle parked, and use your

programmed presets to make radio use

quicker and simpler.

•Never use portable computers or personal

digital assistants while the vehicle is mov-

ing.

Accessory installation

•We strongly recommend that Volvo owners

install only genuine, Volvo-approved

accessories, and that accessory installa-

tions be performed only by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to

ensure compatibility with the performance,

safety, and emission systems in your vehi-

cle. Additionally, a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician knows where

accessories may and may not be safely

installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please

consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician before installing any acces-

sory in or on your vehicle.

•Accessories that have not been approved

by Volvo may or may not be specifically

tested for compatibility with your vehicle.

Additionally, an inexperienced installer

may not be familiar with some of your car's

systems.

•Any of your car's performance and safety

systems could be adversely affected if you

install accessories that Volvo has not tes-

ted, or if you allow accessories to be instal-

led by someone unfamiliar with your vehi-

cle.

•Damage caused by unapproved or

improperly installed accessories may not

be covered by your new vehicle warranty.

See your Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet for more warranty

information. Volvo assumes no responsi-

bility for death, injury, or expenses that

may result from the installation of non-gen-

uine accessories.

Occupant safety...................................................................................... 18

Seat belts................................................................................................ 20

Supplemental Restraint System.............................................................. 23

Front airbags........................................................................................... 24

Occupant Weight Sensor........................................................................ 28

Side impact protection airbags............................................................... 31

Inflatable Curtain..................................................................................... 33

Whiplash Protection System................................................................... 35

Child safety............................................................................................. 37

Child restraint systems........................................................................... 39

Infant seats.............................................................................................. 41

Convertible seats.................................................................................... 43

Booster cushions.................................................................................... 46

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors................................................................. 47

Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 49

Child restraint registration and recalls.................................................... 50

Integrated booster cushion..................................................................... 51

SAFETY

01 Safety

Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety

Safety is the Volvo cornerstone. Our concern

dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled

off the production line. Three-point seat belts

(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy-

absorbing impact zones were designed into

Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable

or required by government regulation. We will

not compromise our commitment to safety. We

continue to seek out new safety features and

to refine those already in our vehicles. You can

help. We would appreciate hearing your sug-

gestions about improving automobile safety.

We also want to know if you ever have a safety

concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S.

at: 800-458-1552 or in Canada at:

800-663-8255.

Occupant safety reminders

How safely you drive doesn't depend on how

old you are but rather on:

•How well you see.

•Your ability to concentrate.

•How quickly you make decisions under

stress to avoid an accident.

The tips listed below are suggestions to help

you cope with the ever changing traffic envi-

ronment.

•Never drink and drive.

•If you are taking any medication, consult

your physician about its potential effects

on your driving abilities.

•Take a driver-retraining course.

•Have your eyes checked regularly.

•Keep your windshield and headlights

clean.

•Replace wiper blades when they start to

leave streaks.

•Take into account the traffic, road, and

weather conditions, particularly with

regard to stopping distance.

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer-

ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar

complaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become

involved in individual problems

between you, your retailer, or Volvo

Cars of North America, LLC. To con-

tact NHTSA, you may either call the

Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-

portation, Washington D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from:

http://www.safercar.gov

Volvo strongly recommends that if

your vehicle is covered under a serv-

ice campaign, safety or emission

recall or similar action, it should be

completed as soon as possible.

Please check with your local retailer

or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

if your vehicle is covered under these

conditions.

NHTSA can be reached at:

Internet:

01 Safety

Occupant safety

http://www.nhtsa.gov

Telephone:

1-888-DASH-2-DOT

(1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada

If you believe your vehicle has a defect that

could cause a crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars

of Canada Corp.

To contact Transport Canada, call

(800) 333-0510, or (613) 993-9851 if you are

calling from the Ottawa region.

01 Safety

Seat belts

Using seat belts

G020104

Adjusting the seat belt

Volvo, the inventor of the three-point seat belt,

urges you and all occupants of your vehicle to

wear seat belts and ensure that children are

properly restrained, using an infant, car, or

booster seat determined by age, weight and

height.

Volvo also believes no child should sit in the

front seat of a vehicle.

Most states and provinces make it mandatory

for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners

The seat belts are equipped with pretensioners

that reduce slack in the belts. These preten-

sioners are triggered in situations where the

airbags deploy. The front seat belts also

include a tension reducing device which, in the

event of a collision, limits the peak forces exer-

ted by the seat belt on the occupant.

Buckling a seat belt

Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch

plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is

heard. The seat belt retractor is normally

"unlocked" and you can move freely, provided

that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.

The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol-

lowing situations:

•if the belt is pulled out rapidly

•during braking and acceleration

•if the vehicle is leaning excessively

•when driving in turns

•if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is acti-

vated

NOTE

Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt)

is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,

which is designed to help keep the seat belt

taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is

pulled out as far as possible. If this is done,

a sound from the seat belt retractor will be

audible, which is normal, and the seat belt

will be pulled taut and locked in place. This

function is automatically disabled when the

seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted.

See also page 38 for information about using

a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor a

child seat.

When wearing the seat belt remember:

•The belt should not be twisted or turned.

•The lap section of the belt must be posi-

tioned low on the hips (not pressing against

the abdomen).

•Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled

up into its retractor and that the shoulder

and lap belts are taut.

Unbuckling the seat belt

To remove the seat belt, press the red section

on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the

vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully

after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the

belt back into the retractor slot.

01 Safety

Seat belts

Seat belt reminder

The seat belt reminder consists of an audible

signal, an indicator light above the rearview

mirror, and a symbol in the instrument panel

that alert the driver and front seat passenger if

their seat belts are not fastened.

WARNING

•Never use a seat belt for more than one

occupant.

•Never wear the shoulder portion of the

belt under the arm, behind the back or

otherwise out of position. Such use

could cause injury in the event of an

accident.

•Seat belts lose much of their strength

when exposed to violent stretching and

should be replaced after any collision,

even if they appear to be undamaged.

•Never repair the belt yourself; have this

work done by an authorized Volvo serv-

ice technician only.

•Any device used to induce slack into the

shoulder belt portion of the three-point

belt system will have a detrimental

effect on the amount of protection avail-

able to you in the event of a collision.

•The seat back should not be tilted too

far back. The shoulder belt must be taut

in order to function properly.

•Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that children who have outgrown these

devices sit in the rear seat with the seat

belt properly fastened.

Seat belt use during pregnancy

G020105

The seat belt should always be worn during

pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the

correct way. The diagonal section should wrap

over the shoulder then be routed between the

breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap

section should lay flat over the thighs and as

low as possible under the belly. It must never

be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack

from the belt and insure that it fits close to the

body without any twists.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers

should adjust their seats and steering wheel

such that they can easily maintain control of the

vehicle as they drive (which means they must

be able to easily operate the foot pedals and

01 Safety

Seat belts

steering wheel). Within this context, they

should strive to position the seat with as large

a distance as possible between their belly and

the steering wheel.

Child seats

Please see page 38 for information on secur-

ing child seats with the seat belts.

Seat belt maintenance

Check periodically that the seat belts are in

good condition. Use water and a mild deter-

gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism

function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull

rapidly on the strap.

01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

G027284

SRS warning light

As an enhancement to the three-point seat

belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple-

mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS

consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air-

bags, side impact airbags, the occupant

weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of

these systems are monitored by the SRS con-

trol module. An SRS warning light in the instru-

ment panel (see the illustration) illuminates

when the ignition key is turned to position I, II,

or III, and will normally go out after approxi-

mately 7 seconds if no faults are detected in

the system.

Where applicable, a text message

will also be displayed when the

SRS warning light illuminates. If

this warning symbol is not func-

tioning properly, the general warn-

ing symbol illuminates and a text message will

be displayed.

WARNING

•If the SRS warning light stays on after

the engine has started or if it illuminates

while you are driving, have the vehicle

inspected by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician as soon as

possible.

•Never try to repair any component or

part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer-

ence in the system could cause mal-

function and serious injury. All work on

these systems should be performed by

an authorized Volvo service technician.

WARNING

If your vehicle has been subjected to flood

conditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standing

water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your

vehicle has become flood-damaged in any

way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or

put the key in the ignition before discon-

necting the battery (see below). This may

cause airbag deployment which could result

in personal injury. Have the vehicle towed to

a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician for repairs.

Automatic transmission:

Before attempting to tow the vehicle, use

the following procedure to override the

shiftlock system to move the gear selector

to the neutral position:

1. Switch off the ignition for at least

10 minutes and disconnect the battery.

2. Wait at least one minute.

3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it

to position II

4. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

5. Move the gear selector from P (Park) to

the N(Neutral) position.

01 Safety

Front airbags

The front airbag system

G020111

The front airbags supplement the three-point

seat belts. For these airbags to provide the

protection intended, seat belts must be worn

at all times.

The front airbag system includes gas genera-

tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-

tion sensors that activate the gas generators,

causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen

gas.

G031006

Location of the passenger's side front airbag

As the movement of the seats' occupants com-

presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel-

led at a controlled rate to provide better cush-

ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also

deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire

process, including inflation and deflation of the

airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec-

ond.

The location of the front airbags is indicated by

SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel

pad and above the glove compartment, and by

decals on both sun visors and on the front and

far right side of the dash.

•The driver's side front airbag is folded and

located in the steering wheel hub.

•The passenger's side front airbag is folded

behind a panel located above the glove

compartment.

WARNING

•The airbags in the vehicle are designed

to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replace-

ment for–the three-point seat belts. For

maximum protection, wear seat belts at

all times. Be aware that no system can

prevent all possible injuries that may

occur in an accident.

•Never drive a vehicle with your hands on

the steering wheel pad/airbag housing.

•The front airbags are designed to help

prevent serious injury. Deployment

occurs very quickly and with consider-

able force. During normal deployment

and depending on variables such as

seating position, one may experience

abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other

injuries as a result from deployment of

one or both of the airbags.

•When installing any accessory equip-

ment, make sure that the front airbag

system is not damaged. Any interfer-

ence in the system could cause mal-

function.

01 Safety

Front airbags

Front airbag deployment

•The front airbags are designed to deploy

during certain frontal or front-angular col-

lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend-

ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and

object impacted. The airbags may also

deploy in certain non-frontal collisions

where rapid deceleration occurs.

•The SRS sensors, which trigger the front

airbags, are designed to react to both the

impact of the collision and the inertial

forces generated by it, and to determine if

the intensity of the collision is sufficient for

the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags

to be deployed.

However, not all frontal collisions activate the

front airbags.

•If the collision involves a nonrigid object

(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed

object at a low speed, the front airbags will

not necessarily deploy.

•Front airbags do not normally deploy in a

side impact collision, in a collision from the

rear or in a rollover situation.

•The amount of damage to the bodywork

does not reliably indicate if the airbags

should have deployed or not.

NOTE

•Deployment of front airbags occurs only

one time during an accident. In a colli-

sion where deployment occurs, the air-

bags and seat belt pretensioners acti-

vate. Some noise occurs and a small

amount of powder is released. The

release of the powder may appear as

smoke-like matter. This is a normal

characteristic and does not indicate fire.

•Volvo's front airbags use special sen-

sors that are integrated with the front

seat buckles. The point at which the air-

bag deploys is determined by whether

or not the seat belt is being used, as well

as the severity of the collision.

•Collisions can occur where only one of

the airbags deploys. If the impact is less

severe, but severe enough to present a

clear injury risk, the airbags are trig-

gered at partial capacity. If the impact is

more severe, the airbags are triggered

at full capacity.

Should you have questions about any compo-

nent in the SRS system, please contact a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician

or Volvo customer support:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocanada.com

01 Safety

Front airbags

WARNING

•Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches

(140 cm) in height who have outgrown

these devices sit in the rear seat with the

seat belt fastened.

•Never drive with the airbags deployed.

The fact that they hang out can impair

the steering of your vehicle. Other

safety systems can also be damaged.

•The smoke and dust formed when the

airbags are deployed can cause skin

and eye irritation in the event of pro-

longed exposure.

G032934

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

Passenger's side airbag decal

WARNING

•Children must never be allowed in the

front passenger's seat.

•Occupants in the front passenger's seat

must never sit on the edge of the seat,

sit leaning toward the instrument panel

or otherwise sit out of position.

•The occupant's back must be as upright

as comfort allows and be against the

seat back with the seat belt properly

fastened.

•Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on

the dash, seat or out of the window.

01 Safety

Front airbags

WARNING

•No objects or accessory equipment,

e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed

on, attached to, or installed near the air

bag hatch (the area above the glove

compartment) or the area affected by

airbag deployment.

•There should be no loose articles, e.g.

coffee cups, on the floor, seat, or dash-

board area.

•Never try to open the airbag cover on

the steering wheel or the passenger's

side dashboard. This should only be

done by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor

Disabling the passenger's side front

airbag

G027050

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults

and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches

(140 cm) be seated in the rear seat of any vehi-

cle with a passenger's side front airbag, and be

properly restrained. Children should always be

seated in child restraints appropriate for their

size and weight. For child safety recommen-

dations, see page 37.

The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is

designed to meet the regulatory requirements

of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will

not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag

under certain conditions.

The OWS works with sensors that are part of

the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The

sensors are designed to detect the presence of

a properly seated occupant and determine if

the passenger's side front airbag should be

enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not

inflate).

The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-

senger's side front airbag when:

•the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,

or has small/medium objects in the front

seat,

•the system determines that an infant is

present in a rear-facing infant seat that is

installed according to the manufacturer's

instructions,

•the system determines that a small child is

present in a forward-facing child restraint

that is installed according to the manufac-

turer's instructions,

•the system determines that a small child is

present in a booster seat,

•a front passenger takes his/her weight off

of the seat for a period of time,

•a child or a small person occupies the front

passenger's seat.

The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on

to remind you that the passenger's side front

airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead

console, near the base of the rearview mirror.

NOTE

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator

lamp will illuminate for a short period of time

when the ignition is turned on to confirm it

is functional. When the front passenger's

seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the

event that the passenger's side front airbag

is enabled (may inflate), the PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off.

However, if a fault is detected in the system:

•The OWS indicator light will stay on

•The SRS warning light (see page 23) will

come on and stay on

•The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF

SERVICE URGENT will be displayed in the

information display.

01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor

WARNING

•If a fault in the system is detected and

indicated as explained, be aware that

the passenger's side front airbag will

not deploy in the event of a collision.

•In this case, the safety systems and

Occupant Weight Sensor should be

inspected by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician as soon as

possible.

WARNING

•Never try to open, remove, or repair any

components in the OWS system. This

could result in system malfunction.

Maintenance or repairs should only be

carried out by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

•The front passenger's seat should not

be modified in any way. This could

reduce pressure on the seat cushion,

which might interfere with the OWS sys-

tem's function.

The OWS is designed to disable (will not inflate)

the passenger's side front airbag when a rear

facing infant seat, a forward-facing child

restraint, or a booster seat is detected. The

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will

illuminate and stay on to remind you that the

passenger's side front airbag is disabled (see

the following table).

Passeng-

er's seat

occu-

pancy sta-

tus

OWS indi-

cator light

status

Passeng-

er's side

front air-

bag status

Seat unoc-

cupied

OWS indica-

tor light

is not

lit

Passenger's

side front

airbag disa-

bled

Seat occu-

pied by low

weight

occupant/

objectA

OWS indica-

tor light

lights

Passenger's

side front

airbag disa-

bled

Seat occu-

pied by

heavy occu-

pant/object

OWS indica-

tor light

is not

lit

Passenger's

side front

airbag ena-

bled

AVolvo recommends that children always be properly

restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats.In

rare situations when the seat belt is not properly fastened,

some child restraints may not be detected by the OWS

because there is very little weight on the vehicle seat cush-

ion. In these cases the passenger's side front airbag may be

disabled, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp

will not be lit. Do not assume that the passenger's side front

airbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly

installed (turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from

the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child

restraint manufacturer's instructions) and that the

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, or move

the child restraint to the rear seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)

the passenger's side front airbag in the event

of a collision anytime the system senses that a

person of adult size is sitting properly in the

front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and

remain off.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front

passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible

that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat.

If this happens:

1. Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to

place the seat back in an upright position.

2. Have the person sit upright in the seat,

centered on the seat cushion, with the per-

son's legs comfortably extended.

3. Restart the vehicle and have the person

remain in this position for about two

minutes. This will allow the system to

detect that person and enable the pas-

senger's frontal airbag.

4. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator

lamp remains on even after this, the person

should be advised to ride in the rear seat.

01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor

This condition reflects limitations of the OWS

classification capability. It does not indicate

OWS malfunction.

Modifications

If you are considering modifying your vehicle in

any way to accommodate a disability, for

example by altering or adapting the driver's or

front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-

tems, please contact Volvo at:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh,

New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

WARNING

•No objects that add to the total weight

on the seat should be placed on the

front passenger's seat. If a child is

seated in the front passenger's seat

with any additional weight, this extra

weight could cause the OWS system to

enable the airbag, which might cause it

to deploy in the event of a collision,

thereby injuring the child.

•The seat belt should never be wrapped

around an object on the front passeng-

er's seat. This could interfere with the

OWS system's function.

•The front passenger's seat belt should

never be used in a way that exerts more

pressure on the passenger than normal.

This could increase the pressure exer-

ted on the weight sensor by a child, and

could result in the airbag being enabled,

which might cause it to deploy in the

event of a collision, thereby injuring the

child.

WARNING

Keep the following points in mind with

respect to the OWS system. Failure to follow

these instructions could adversely affect the

system's function and result in serious injury

to the occupant of the front passenger's

seat:

•The full weight of the front seat passen-

ger should always be on the seat cush-

ion. The passenger should never lift

him/herself off the seat cushion using

the armrest in the door or the center

console, by pressing the feet on the

floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat

cushion, or by pressing against the

backrest in a way that reduces pressure

on the seat cushion. This could cause

OWS to disable the front passenger's

side airbag.

•Do not place any type of object on the

front passenger's seat in such a way

that jamming, pressing, or squeezing

occurs between the object and the front

seat, other than as a direct result of the

correct use of the Automatic Locking

Retractor/Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 38).

•No objects should be placed under the

front passenger's seat. This could inter-

fere with the OWS system's function.

01 Safety

Side impact protection airbags

Side impact airbags – front seats only

G020118

Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbag

As an enhancement to the structural side

impact protection built into your vehicle, the

vehicle is also equipped with Side Impact Pro-

tection System (SIPS) airbags.

The SIPS airbag system is designed to help

increase occupant protection in the event of

certain side impact collisions. The SIPS air-

bags are designed to deploy only during cer-

tain side-impact collisions, depending on the

crash severity, angle, speed and point of

impact.

G025315

Driver's side SIPS airbag

G025316

Passenger's side SIPS airbag

NOTE

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs

only on the side of the vehicle affected by

the impact. The airbags are not designed to

deploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system

This SIPS airbag system consists of gas gen-

erators and side airbag modules built into the

outboard sides of both front seat backrests.

01 Safety

Side impact protection airbags

WARNING

•The SIPS airbag system is a supple-

ment to the structural Side Impact Pro-

tection System and the three-point seat

belt system. It is not designed to deploy

during collisions from the front or rear of

the vehicle or in rollover situations.

•The use of seat covers on the front seats

may impede SIPS airbag deployment.

•No objects, accessory equipment or

stickers may be placed on, attached to

or installed near the SIPS airbag system

or in the area affected by SIPS airbag

deployment.

•Never try to open or repair any compo-

nents of the SIPS airbag system. This

should be done only by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•In order for the SIPS airbag to provide

its best protection, both front seat

occupants should sit in an upright posi-

tion with the seat belt properly fastened.

•Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury to the occupants of the

vehicle in the event of an accident.

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain

The Inflatable Curtain (IC)

G027047

This system consists of inflatable curtains

located along the sides of the roof liners,

stretching from the front side windows to the

rear edge of the rear side windows. It is

designed to help protect the heads of the occu-

pants of the front seats and the occupants of

the outboard rear seating positions, including

the outboard passenger in the third row of

seats in certain side impact collisions.

G027048

The inflatable curtains in the Volvo XC90 are

also designed to help protect the occupants of

the vehicle in a roll-over situation, and to help

prevent them from being thrown from the vehi-

cle if a roll-over occurs.

NOTE

The Inflatable Curtains extend to protect all

three rows of seats.

By design, the IC system deploys only on the

side of the vehicle affected by the impact.

However, in certain side impacts, or in a roll-

over situation, BOTH the Inflatable Curtains

and the Side Impact Airbag System (SIPS-bag)

will deploy, whereas, in some cases, ONLY the

Inflatable Curtain will deploy. In cases where

BOTH the Inflatable Curtain and the SIPS-bag

deploy, deployment will occur simultaneously.

NOTE

If the Inflatable Curtain deploys, it remains

inflated for approximately 5 seconds.

WARNING

•The IC system is a supplement to the

Side Impact Protection System. It is not

designed to deploy during collisions

from the front or rear of the vehicle or in

all rollover situations.

•Never try to open or repair any compo-

nents of the IC system. This should be

done only by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

•Never hang heavy items from the ceiling

handles. This could impede deployment

of the Inflatable curtain.

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain

WARNING

In order for the VIC to provide its best pro-

tection, both front seat occupants and both

outboard rear seat occupants should sit in

an upright position with the seat belt prop-

erly fastened; adults using the seat belt and

children using the proper child restraint sys-

tem. Only adults should sit in the front seats.

Children must never be allowed in the front

passenger seat. See page 38 for guide-

lines. Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an

accident.

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – front seats only

G020347

The Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) con-

sists of specially designed hinges and brackets

on the front seat backrests designed to help

absorb some of the energy generated in a col-

lision from the rear (when the vehicle is "rear-

ended").

In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges

and brackets of the front seat backrests are

designed to change position slightly to allow

the backrest/head restraint to help support the

occupant's head before moving slightly rear-

ward. This movement helps absorb some of

the forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING

•The WHIPS system is designed to sup-

plement the other safety systems in

your vehicle. For this system to function

properly, the three-point seat belt must

be worn. Please be aware that no sys-

tem can prevent all possible injuries that

may occur in an accident.

•The WHIPS system is designed to func-

tion in certain collisions from the rear,

depending on the crash severity, angle

and speed.

WARNING

Occupants in the front seats must never sit

out of position. The occupant's back must

be as upright as comfort allows and be

against the seat back with the seat belt

properly fastened.

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System

WARNING

•If your vehicle has been involved in a

rear-end collision, the front seat backr-

ests must be inspected by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician, even

if the seats appear to be undamaged.

Certain components in the WHIPS sys-

tem may need to be replaced.

•Do not attempt to service any compo-

nent in the WHIPS system yourself.

G020125

WARNING

Any contact between the front seat backr-

ests and the folded rear seat could impede

the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear

seat is folded down, the occupied front

seats must be adjusted forward so that they

do not touch the folded rear seat.

G020126

WARNING

•Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind

the front seats could impede the func-

tion of the WHIPS system.

•If the rear seat backrests are folded

down, cargo must be secured to pre-

vent it from sliding forward against the

front seat backrests in the event of a

collision from the rear. This could inter-

fere with the action of the WHIPS sys-

tem.

01 Safety

Child safety

Children should be seated safely

Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint

systems for all occupants including children.

Remember that, regardless of age and size, a

child should always be properly restrained in a

vehicle.

Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/

LATCH attachments, which make it more con-

venient to install child seats.

Some restraint systems for children are

designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap

belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.

Such child restraint systems can help protect

children in vehicles in the event of an accident

only if they are used properly. However, chil-

dren could be endangered in a crash if the child

restraints are not properly secured in the vehi-

cle. Failure to follow the installation instructions

for your child restraint can result in your child

striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.

Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable

substitute for a child restraint system. In an

accident, a child held in a person's arms can

be crushed between the vehicle's interior and

an unrestrained person. The child could also be

injured by striking the interior, or by being ejec-

ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver

or impact. The same can also happen if the

infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat.

Other occupants should also be properly

restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring

or increasing the injury of a child.

All states and provinces have legislation gov-

erning how and where children should be car-

ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist-

ing in your state or province. Recent accident

statistics have shown that children are safer in

rear seating positions than front seating posi-

tions when properly restrained. A child restraint

system can help protect a child in a vehicle.

Here's what to look for when selecting a child

restraint system:

•It should have a label certifying that it

meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Can-

ada, CMVSS 213.

•Make sure the child restraint system is

approved for the child's height, weight and

development – the label required by the

standard or regulation, or instructions for

infant restraints, typically provide this infor-

mation.

•In using any child restraint system, we urge

you to carefully look over the instructions

that are provided with the restraint. Be sure

you understand them and can use the

device properly and safely in this vehicle.

A misused child restraint system can result

in increased injuries for both the infant or

child and other occupants in the vehicle.

When a child has outgrown the child safety

seat, you should use the rear seat with the

standard seat belt fastened. The best way to

help protect the child here is to place the child

on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly

located on the hips, see page 46. Legislation

in your state or province may mandate the use

of a child seat or cushion in combination with

the seat belt, depending on the child's age and/

or size. Please check local regulations.

A specially designed and tested booster cush-

ion and backrest can be obtained from your

Volvo retailer.

USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs.

(15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm)

in height

Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.

(18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm)

in height

01 Safety

Child safety

WARNING

•Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that children under 4 feet 7 inches

(140 cm) in height who have outgrown

these devices sit in the rear seat with the

seat belt fastened.

•On hot days, the temperature in the

vehicle interior can rise very quickly.

Exposure to these high temperatures

for even a short period of time can

cause heat-related injury or death.

Small children are particularly at risk.

Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/

ELR)

To make child seat installation easier, each

seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-

ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the

seat belt taut.

When attaching the seat belt to a child seat:

1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat

according to the child seat manufacturer's

instructions.

2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.

3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the

buckle (lock) in the usual way.

4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around

the child seat. A sound from the seat belt

retractor will be audible at this time and

is normal.

The belt will now be locked in place.

This function is automatically disabled

when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt

is fully retracted.

WARNING

Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend that

children who have outgrown these devices

sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly

fastened.

Volvo's recommendations

Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit

in the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite simple

really. A front airbag is a very powerful device

designed, by law, to help protect an adult.

Because of the size of the airbag and its speed

of inflation, a child should never be placed in

the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel-

ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo

has been an innovator in safety for over sev-

enty-five years, and we'll continue to do our

part. But we need your help. Please remember

to put your children in the back seat, and

buckle them up.

Volvo has some very specific

recommendations:

•Always wear your seat belt.

•Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety

device which, when used with a three-

point seat belt can help reduce serious

injuries during certain types of accidents.

Volvo recommends that you do not dis-

connect the airbag system in your vehicle.

•Volvo strongly recommends that everyone

in the vehicle be properly restrained.

•Volvo recommends that ALL occupants

(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet

7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back

seat of any vehicle with a front passenger

side airbag.

•Drive safely!

01 Safety

Child restraint systems

Child restraints

G026491

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraint

systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and

booster cushions. They are classified accord-

ing to the child's age and size.

The following section provides general infor-

mation on securing a child restraint using a

three-point seat belt. Refer to page 47 and

page 49 for information on securing a child

restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

and/or top tether anchorages.

G026503

Convertible seat

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag – not even if the

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF symbol near

the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehi-

cles equipped with Occupant Weight Sen-

sor). If the severity of an accident were to

cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to

serious injury or death to a child seated in

this position.

G026489

Booster cushion

WARNING

Always refer to the child restraint manufac-

turer's instructions for detailed information

on securing the restraint.

01 Safety

Child restraint systems

WARNING

•When not in use, keep the child restraint

system secured or remove it from the

passenger compartment to help pre-

vent it from injuring passengers in the

event of a sudden stop or collision.

•A small child's head represents a con-

siderable part of its total weight and its

neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-

mends that children up to age 4 travel,

properly restrained, facing rearward. In

addition, Volvo recommends that chil-

dren should ride rearward facing, prop-

erly restrained, as long as possible.

01 Safety

Infant seats

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt

G026417

Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng-

er's seat

NOTE

Refer to page 47 and page 49 for infor-

mation on securing a child restraint using

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top

tether anchorages.

G026493

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat

WARNING

•An infant seat must be in the rear-facing

position only.

•The infant seat should not be positioned

behind the driver's seat unless there is

adequate space for safe installation.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the

vehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat

according to the manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

G026492

Fasten the seat belt

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag – not even if

the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near

the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehi-

cles equipped with Occupant Weight Sen-

sor). If the severity of an accident were to

cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to

serious injury or death to a child seated in

this position.

01 Safety

Infant seats

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

G026494

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt

out as far as possible to activate the belt's

automatic locking function.

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

NOTE

The locking retractor will automatically

release when the seat belt is unbuckled and

allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the

seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound

from the seat belt retractor's automatic

locking function will be audible at this time

and is normal. The seat belt should now be

locked in place.

6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat

belt path to ensure that it is held securely

in place by the seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the child

restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)

in any direction along the seat belt path.

The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling

the seat belt and letting it retract completely.

01 Safety

Convertible seats

Securing a convertible seat with a seat

belt

G026420

Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas-

senger's seat

NOTE

Refer to page 47 and page 49 for infor-

mation on securing a child restraint using

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top

tether anchorages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for-

ward or rearward-facing position, depending

on the age and size of the child.

WARNING

Always use a convertible seat that is suita-

ble for the child's age and size. See the con-

vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda-

tions.

G026503

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

WARNING

A small child's head represents a consider-

able part of its total weight and its neck is

still very weak. Volvo recommends that chil-

dren up to age 4 travel, properly restrained,

facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recom-

mends that children should ride rearward

facing, properly restrained, as long as pos-

sible.

G026500

Fasten the seat belt

01 Safety

Convertible seats

WARNING

•Convertible child seats should be instal-

led in the rear seat only.

•A rear-facing convertible seat should not

be positioned behind the driver's seat

unless there is adequate space for safe

installation.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat

of the vehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat

according to the manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt

out as far as possible to activate the belt's

automatic locking function.

G026501

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

NOTE

The locking retractor will automatically

release when the seat belt is unbuckled and

allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,

let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A

sound from the seat belt retractor's auto-

matic locking function will be audible at

this time and is normal. The seat belt

should now be locked in place.

6. Push and pull the convertible seat along

the seat belt path to ensure that it is held

securely in place by the seat belt.

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the child

restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)

in any direction along the seat belt path.

The convertible seat can be removed by

unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract

completely.

01 Safety

Convertible seats

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag – not even if the

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF symbol near

the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehi-

cles equipped with Occupant Weight Sen-

sor). If the severity of an accident were to

cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to

serious injury or death to a child seated in

this position.

01 Safety

Booster cushions

Securing a booster cushion

G026513

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion

Booster cushions are recommended for chil-

dren who have outgrown convertible seats.

1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat

of the vehicle.

2. With the child properly seated on the

booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or

around the cushion according to the man-

ufacturer's instructions.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

G026517

Positioning the seat belt

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and

fits snugly around the child.

WARNING

•The hip section of the three-point seat

belt must fit snugly across the child's

hips, not across the stomach.

•The shoulder section of the three-point

seat belt should be positioned across

the chest and shoulder.

•The shoulder belt must never be placed

behind the child's back or under the

arm.

01 Safety

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child

seat anchors

G015268

ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped

child seats are located in the second row, out-

board seats, hidden below the backrest cush-

ions. Symbols on the seat back upholstery

mark the anchor positions (see the illustration).

To access the anchors:

1. Put the child restraint in position.

2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down

the seat cushion and locate the anchors by

feel.

3. Fasten the attachment on the child

restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/

LATCH lower anchors.

4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps

according to the manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

WARNING

Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to

FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to

the child restraint system's manual for

weight and size ratings.

WARNING

The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint

anchors are only intended for use with child

seats positioned in the outboard seating

positions. These anchors are not certified

for use with any child restraint that is posi-

tioned in the center seating position. When

securing a child restraint in the center seat-

ing position, use only the vehicle's center

seat belt.

NOTE

•The rear seat's center position is not

equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower

anchors. When installing a child

restraint in this position, attach the

restraint's top tether strap (if it is so

equipped) to the top tether anchorage

point and secure the restraint with the

vehicle's center seat belt.

•Always follow your child seat manufac-

turer's installation instructions, and use

both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and

top tethers whenever possible.

G031682

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/

LATCH lower anchors

01 Safety

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

WARNING

Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly

to the anchor (see the illustration). If the

attachment is not correctly fastened, the

child restraint may not be properly secured

in the event of a collision.

01 Safety

Top tether anchors

G027032

Top tether anchorage points

Your vehicle is equipped with child restraint top

tether anchorages in all second row seat posi-

tions (second-row seats only in 7-seat models).

Using the top tether anchorages

•Place the child restraint on the rear seat.

•Route the top tether strap under the head

restraint and fasten its attachment to the

anchorage.

WARNING

Be sure to fasten the child tether attachment

correctly to the anchor. If it is not correctly

fastened, the child seat may not be properly

restrained in the event of a collision.

•Firmly tension the top tether strap accord-

ing to the child restraint manufacturer's

instructions. Tension the top tether strap

only after the lower anchor straps or the

seat belt have been firmly tensioned.

For securing the child restraint to ISOFIX/

LATCH lower anchors,see page 47.

WARNING

•Never route a top tether strap over the

top or around the head restraint. It

should always be routed under the head

restraint.

•Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly fitted child restraints. Under

no circumstances are they to be used

for adult seat belts or harnesses. The

anchorages are not able to withstand

excessive forces on them in the event of

collision if full harness seat belts or adult

seat belts are installed to them. An adult

who uses a belt anchored in a child

restraint anchorage runs a great risk of

suffering severe injuries should a colli-

sion occur.

•Do not install rear speakers that require

the removal of the top tether anchors or

interfere with the proper use of the top

tether strap.

01 Safety

Child restraint registration and recalls

Registering a child restraint

Child restraints could be recalled for safety

reasons. You must register your child restraint

to be reached in a recall. To stay informed

about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out

and return the registration card that comes

with new child restraints.

Child restraint recall information is readily avail-

able in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall

information in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern-

ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.

In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child

Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51

Integrated booster cushion*

G031071

Volvo's own integrated booster cushion has

been specially designed to help safeguard a

child seated in the rear seat. When using an

integrated booster cushion, the child must be

secured with the vehicle's three-point seat

belt.

Use this booster cushion only with children

who weigh between 33 and 80 lbs (15 and

36 kg) and whose height is between 38 and

54 in (97 and 137 cm). In Canada, Transport

Canada's weight recommendation is

40 – 80 lbs (18 – 36 kg).

The booster cushion is designed to raise the

child higher, so that the shoulder strap crosses

over the child's collarbone, not over the child's

neck. If using a booster cushion does not result

in proper positioning of the shoulder strap,

then the child should be placed in a properly

secured child restraint (see page 37 for infor-

mation). The shoulder belt must never be

placed behind the child's back or under the

arm.

WARNING

•Death or serious injury can

occur.

•Follow all instructions on the booster

cushion and in the vehicle's owner's

manual.

•Make sure the booster cush-

ion is securely locked before

the child is seated.

•Use this booster cushion only with chil-

dren who weigh between 33 and 80 lbs

(15 and 36 kg) and whose height is

between 38 and 54 in (97 and 137 cm).

In Canada, Transport Canada's weight

recommendation is 40 – 80 lbs

(18 - 36 kg).

•In the event of a collision while the inte-

grated booster cushion was occupied,

the entire booster cushion and seat belt

must be replaced. The booster cushion

should also be replaced if it is badly

worn or damaged in any way. This work

should be performed by an authorized

Volvo retailer only.

NOTE

Canada only: This cushion may be referred

to as a built-in booster cushion.

01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion

G030708

Raising

1. Pull the handle at the front of the cushion

forward.

2. Move the seat belt latch aside before rais-

ing the cushion.

3. With both hands push the cushion rear-

ward.

4. Push the cushion until it locks in place.

Lowering

1. Pull the handle at the front of the cushion-

forward.

2. Pull the seat forward and press it down

until it locks in place.

The booster cushion must be pressed down

before the backrest can be folded down.

01 Safety

54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Instrument overview................................................................................ 56

Instrument panel..................................................................................... 58

Information display.................................................................................. 62

Center console buttons........................................................................... 64

Steering wheel adjustment..................................................................... 66

Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 67

Manually unlocking the fuel filler door.................................................... 69

Left-side steering wheel lever................................................................. 70

Right-side steering wheel lever............................................................... 71

Hazard warning flashers......................................................................... 74

Trip computer.......................................................................................... 75

Cruise control.......................................................................................... 77

12-volt sockets....................................................................................... 79

Hood/tailgate.......................................................................................... 80

Power windows....................................................................................... 81

Mirrors..................................................................................................... 83

Power moonroof..................................................................................... 86

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*................................................... 88

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

02 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

G000000

02 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57

Headlights/Parking lights

Panel vents

Display

Temperature gauge

Odometer/Trip odometer/Cruise control

indicator

Speedometer

Turn signal indicator lights

Tachometer

Ambient temperature gauge, clock, gear

indicator

Fuel gauge

Indicator and warning symbols

Panel vents

Glove compartment

Hazard warning flashers

Audio system

Climate system controls

Windshield wiper/washer lever

Audio control buttons in steering wheel

Instrument panel

Horn

Cruise control buttons in steering wheel

Turn signals, High/low beams, READ-but-

ton

Parking brake pedal

Parking brake release handle

Reading lights

Courtesy light

Moonroof control*

Seat belt reminder

Rearview mirror

Control panel in the driver's door

G029570

Central locking button

Lockout switch for rear seat power win-

dows

Power window controls

Door mirror controls

02 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel

G027133

Turn signal indicators – right/left

Text window – The text window displays

information and warning messages.

Temperature gauge – The pointer should

be approximately midway on the gauge

when driving. Do not drive the vehicle if

the warning light is on. The text window

will provide you with additional informa-

tion. If the engine temperature remains

high, check coolant level – see page 217.

Trip odometer – The trip odometers are

used for measuring shorter distances. The

right-hand digit gives tenth of a mile/kilo-

meter. Press the button for more than

2 seconds to reset. Change between trip

odometers 1 and 2 using one short press

on the button. – The display presents infor-

mation and warning messages, the ambi-

ent temperature, and the clock, etc. When

the ambient temperature is between 23°

and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake

symbol is shown in the display. This sym-

bol serves as a warning for possible slip-

pery road surfaces. Please note that this

symbol does not indicate a fault with your

car. At low speeds, or when the car is not

moving, the temperature readings may be

slightly higher than the actual ambient tem-

perature.

Odometer

Speedometer

Warning symbol

High beam indicator

Tachometer – The tachometer shows

engine speed in thousands of revolutions

per minute (rpm). Do not drive continuously

with the needle in the red area of the dial,

which indicates maximum allowable

engine rpm range. Instead, shift to a higher

gear or slow the vehicle down. The engine

management system will automatically

prevent excessively high engines speeds.

This will be noticeable as a pronounced

unevenness in engine speed.

02 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel

Gear and driving mode indicator – The cur-

rently selected driving mode is displayed

here. If you use the Geartronic function on

the automatic transmission, the currently

selected gear will be displayed.

Ambient temperature gauge – This display

indicates the air temperature outside your

vehicle. A "snowflake" symbol in the text

window is displayed when the temperature

is in the range of 23 – 36 °F (–5 – +2 °C).

Please note that this symbol does not indi-

cate a fault with your vehicle. At low

speeds or when the vehicle is not moving,

the temperature readings may be slightly

higher than the actual ambient tempera-

ture.

Clock/set button – Turn the button to set

the clock.

Fuel gauge – see page 282 for fuel tank

volume. When the warning light in the

gauge comes on, the vehicle should be

refueled as soon as possible. The trip com-

puter section (see page 75) provides

more information on fuel level and con-

sumption.

Indicator and warning symbols – The indi-

cator and warning symbols1light up when

you turn the ignition key to the driving posi-

tion (position II) before starting.

G027134

This shows that the symbols are functioning.

When the engine starts, all symbols go out. If

the engine is not started within 5 seconds, all

symbols except CHECK ENGINE and

go out. Certain symbols may not have their

functions illustrated, depending on the vehi-

cle's equipment. The symbol for the parking

brake goes out when the parking brake is

released.

Warning/information symbol in center of

the instrument panel

This symbol shines as a red or yel-

low light depending on the nature

of the information displayed.

Red symbol – Stop the vehicle as soon as

possible in a suitable location and read the

message shown in the text window. The sym-

bol and accompanying text will remain on until

the fault has been corrected.

Yellow symbol – Follow the instructions

shown in the text window. The text can be

erased by pressing the READ button (see

page 62), or will disappear automatically after

two minutes.

NOTE

When the message TIME FOR REGULAR

SERVICE is displayed, the text can be

erased and the yellow symbol light can be

turned off by pressing the READ button.

The text will disappear and the symbol light

will go out automatically after two minutes.

1On certain engines, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 215.

02 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel

Seat belt reminder

This symbol lights up to indicate

that the driver has not fastened his/

her seat belt.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

If this light comes on while the

vehicle is being driven, or remains

on for longer than approximately

10 seconds after the vehicle has

been started, the SRS system's

diagnostic functions have detected a fault in a

seat belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag,

side impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain.

Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician as soon as

possible.

BRAKE – Brake failure warning light

If the light comes on while driving or braking,

stop immediately, open the hood and check

the brake fluid level in the reservoir. see

page 218.

Canadian models are equipped

with this warning light.

If the BRAKE and ABS warning lights come

on at the same time, this could indicate a

fault in the brake system.

•Stop the vehicle in a suitable place and

switch off the engine.

•Restart the engine.

•If both warning lights go off, no further

action is required.

•If both lights are still on after the engine has

been restarted, switch off the engine again

and check the brake fluid level (see

page 218 for the location of the brake fluid

reservoir).

If the brake fluid level is above the MIN mark,

drive carefully to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician and have the brake system

inspected.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the

reservoir or if a Brake failure – Service

urgent message is displayed in the text

window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician and have the brake system

inspected.

PARK BRAKE Parking brake applied

This light will be on when the parking brake

(hand brake) is applied. The parking brake

pedal is located on the left side of the driver's

footwell, see page 79 for more information.

Canadian models are equipped

with this symbol.

Oil pressure warning light

If the light comes on while driv-

ing, stop the vehicle and then

stop the engine immediately and

check the engine oil level, see

page 62. If the light stays on after

restart, have the vehicle towed to the nearest

trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

After hard driving, the light may come on occa-

sionally when the engine is idling. This is nor-

mal, provided it goes off when the engine

speed is increased.

Generator warning light

If the light comes on while the

engine is running, have the charg-

ing system checked.

2On certain engines, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 62.

02 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel

Rear fog light

This light indicates that the fog

light is on.

CHECK ENGINE Malfunction indicator

light

On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII): As you drive,

a computer called "OBDII" monitors your vehi-

cle's engine, transmission, electrical and emis-

sion systems. The CHECK ENGINE light will

light up if the computer senses a condition that

potentially may need correcting. When this

happens, please have your vehicle checked by

a trained and qualified Volvo service technician

as soon as possible.

A CHECK ENGINE light may have many cau-

ses. Sometimes, you may not notice a change

in your vehicle's behavior. Even so, an uncor-

rected condition could hurt fuel economy,

emission cleanliness, and driveability.

Extended driving without correcting the cause

could even damage other components in your

vehicle.

Canadian models are equipped

with this warning light.

ABS (Anti-lock brake system)

If the warning light comes on, there

is a malfunction of the ABS system

(the standard braking system will

still function). The vehicle should

be driven to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for inspection. See

page 149 for additional information.

DSTC system

The Dynamic Stability and Traction

Control system (DSTC) is

explained in greater detail on page

152.

Tire pressure monitoring light

See page 195 for more informa-

tion on this function.

Turn signal indicator – trailer (certain

models)

If you are towing a trailer, this light

will flash simultaneously with the

turn signals on the trailer. If the

light does not flash when signaling,

neither the trailer's turn signals nor

the vehicle's turn signals are functioning.

02 Instruments and controls

Information display

Message in the text windows

G026979

When a warning light in the instrument panel

comes on, a message is also displayed in the

text window. After you have read the message,

you can erase it by pressing button A (see illus-

tration).

NOTE

Certain messages cannot be erased until

the condition has been corrected.

If a warning message is displayed when e.g.

you are using the trip computer, this message

must be erased before you can access the

function of your choice. Press button A to erase

the warning message.

You can scroll through the stored messages by

pressing button A (see illustration). The text

window can be cleared (the message will be

returned to memory) by pressing button A

again.

Message Meaning

STOP SAFELY Stop the car in a safe place and switch off the engine to help prevent the risk of serious damage.

STOP ENGINE Stop the car in a safe place and switch off the engine to help prevent the risk of serious damage.

SERVICE URGENT Take your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection immediately.

SEE MANUAL Refer to your owner's manual. For additional information, please contact your Volvo retailer.

SERVICE REQUIRED Take your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection at your convenience

(but preferably before the next scheduled maintenance service).

FIX NEXT SERVICE Have the system affected inspected at the next scheduled maintenance service.

02 Instruments and controls

Information display

Message Meaning

TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE This message will be displayed at 7,500 mile (12,000 km) intervals, after 750 hours of driving or after

12 months, whichever occurs first, to remind the driver that the service interval has been exceeded. The

message will be displayed for 2 minutes each time the vehicle is started until reset by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

OIL LEVEL LOW – FILL OILACheck the oil level and top up if necessary, see page 215.

OIL LEVEL LOW – STOP SAFELYBStop as soon as possible and switch off the engine, check the oil level and top up if necessary, see

page 215.

OIL LEVEL LOW – STOP ENGINEBStop as soon as possible and switch off the engine, check the oil level and top up if necessary, see

page 215.

OIL LEVEL LOW – SEE MANUALBStop as soon as possible and switch off the engine, check the oil level and top up if necessary, see

page 215.

DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF The stability system's spin control function has been turned off, see page 152 for details.

AThe yellow warning symbol also lights up (see page 58).

BThe red warning symbol also lights up (see page 58).

02 Instruments and controls

Center console buttons

64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G026944

Active Bending Lights*

The beams of these headlights

adjust laterally to help light up a

curve according to movements

of the steering wheel when the

vehicle is turning. This function

is activated automatically when

the engine is started and can be deactivated/

reactivated by pressing the button. The indica-

tor light in the button is on when the function is

activated, also see page 67.

Rear seat air conditioning*

This button controls the

optional rear seat air condition-

ing system.

Folding door mirrors*

Press the button and release it

to fold the door mirrors in or

out. On certain models, when

the button is pressed, there

may be a long pause before the

mirrors move. Pressing the but-

ton again during this pause may erase your first

button press. If this happens, wait ten seconds

and press the button one more time.

The mirrors cannot be adjusted during the first

ten seconds after they have been folded out.

02 Instruments and controls

Center console buttons

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65

NOTE

If the door mirrors have been inadvertently

pushed out of position (in a car wash, park-

ing lot, etc.) manually return them to normal

position. If mirror adjustment does not seem

to operate after manual folding, reset the

folding mirrors as follows:

•Turn the ignition key to position II.

•Manually fold the mirror(s) to the normal

position.

•Press the button to fold both mirrors in.

•Press the button again to fold the mir-

rors out to their normal position.

Park Assist*

This system provides an audi-

ble warning when the vehicle is

being parked or if it is driven

close to a person or object. For

more information see

page 154.

NOTE

The system activates automatically when

the engine is started, and can be deacti-

vated by pressing this button (e.g. when

towing a trailer) or reactivated if necessary.

Auxiliary lights

This button is used to switch on

auxiliary lights (if installed). A

light in the button will light up to

indicate that the auxiliary lights

are illuminated.

12 volt socket

This 12 volt socket can be used

to plug in certain accessories

such as cellular telephones,

etc. The ignition key must be in

position I (or higher) for the aux-

iliary socket to function.

NOTE

The auxiliary sockets can also be used for

cigarette lighters, which are available as

accessories at your Volvo retailer.

Power child locks*

For more information on this

function, see page 130.

02 Instruments and controls

Steering wheel adjustment

G026999

Both the height and the reach of the steering

wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable posi-

tion for the driver. Pull down the lever on the

left of the steering column. Adjust the steering

wheel to a suitable position and press the lever

back into place to lock the steering wheel in the

new position. Check that the steering wheel is

locked in the new position.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-

ing.

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67

Headlight/parking light switch

Front fog lights

Rear fog light

Instrument panel lighting

Fuel filler door unlock button

Parking lights

The front and rear parking lights can be turned

on even when the ignition is switched off.

Turn switch (1) to position .

The license plate lights also illuminate when the

parking lights are switched on.

Headlights

1. Turn the ignition key to position II.

2. The low beam headlights (daytime running

lights) illuminate automatically, except

when the light switch (1) is in position

For information on switching between high and

low beams, see page 70.

NOTE

Active Bending Lights*: Turn the headlight

switch to position 0 to activate a daylight

sensor, which automatically switches the

low beams on or off, depending on ambient

light conditions. When driving in daylight,

the headlights will switch off and the day-

time running lights will come on. In dark-

ness, the daytime running lights will switch

off and the Active Bending Lights will switch

on.

G020789

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light

function deactivated (left) and activated (right)

1On Canadian models, the daytime running lights will remain on with the light switch in this position.

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

When this function is activated, the headlight

beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve

according to movements of the steering wheel

(see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).

The ABL function is activated automatically

when the engine is started and can be deacti-

vated/reactivated by pressing the button in the

center console (see page 64.

Fog lights

Front fog lights*

The front fog lights can be used in combination

with either the headlights or the parking lights.

1. Turn the ignition key to position II.

2. Press button (2) to turn on the front fog

lights.

An indicator light in the button illuminates when

the front fog lights are on.

Rear fog light

The single rear fog light is located in the driver's

side of the vehicle.

The rear fog light will only function in combi-

nation with the high/low beam headlights or the

optional front fog lights.

1. Turn the ignition key to position II.

2. Press button (3) to turn on the rear fog light.

An indicator light in the button illuminates when

the rear fog light is on.

NOTE

The rear fog light is considerably brighter

than the normal tail lights and should be

used only when conditions such as fog, rain,

snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for

other vehicles to less than 500 ft.

(150 meters).

Instrument panel lighting

The instrument panel lighting illuminates when

the ignition key is in position II and the light

switch (1) is in either position or .

Move the thumb wheel (4) up to increase

brightness or down to decrease bright-

ness.

Unlocking the fuel filler door

Press button (5) when the vehicle is at a stand-

still to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note

that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until

the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible

click will be heard when the fuel filler door

relocks.

NOTE

If the fuel filler door does not unlock after the

button has been pressed, drive the vehicle

at a speed of at least 5 mph (8 km/h), stop

the vehicle, and press the button again.

For information on unlocking the fuel filler door

manually, see page 69.

02 Instruments and controls

Manually unlocking the fuel filler door

G027077

Panel on passenger's side of cargo area

To manually unlock the fuel filler door

1. Open the upper and lower sections of the

tailgate, and fold up the rear section of the

cargo area floor.

2. If the vehicle is equipped with the optional

grocery bag holder, detach the holder's

bands.

3. Remove the corner panel from the floor of

the cargo area.

4. Open the cover in the side panel by pulling

the tab upward/outward.

5. Pull down the insulating material to access

the fuel filler door motor.

G027034

6. Move the catch rearward to unlock the fuel

filler door lock, or move it forward to lock

the filler door.

02 Instruments and controls

Left-side steering wheel lever

Lever positions

G026954

Turn signals, lane change position

Turn signals, position for normal turns

High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams,

Home Safe lighting

Turn signals

When turning

Move the lever as far up or down as possible

(to position 2) to start the turn signals. The turn

signals will be cancelled automatically by the

movement of the steering wheel, or the lever

can be returned to its initial position by hand.

When changing lanes

The driver can automatically flash the turn sig-

nals 3 times by:

•Moving the turn signal lever up or down to

position (1) and releasing it.

•Moving the lever up or down to position (2)

and immediately back to its original posi-

tion.

NOTE

•This automatic flashing sequence can

be interrupted by immediately moving

the lever in the opposite direction.

•If the turn signal indicator flashes faster

than normal, check for a burned-out

turn signal bulb.

High/low beam headlights

Continuous high beams

1. Turn the ignition key to position II.

2. With the light switch in position , (see

page 67) pull the turn signal lever toward

the steering wheel to toggle between high

and low beams.

High beam flash

1. Turn the ignition key to position II.

2. Pull the turn signal lever to position (3). The

high beams will remain on until the lever is

released.

Home safe lighting

When leaving your vehicle at night, home safe

lighting can illuminate the area in front of the

vehicle.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible

toward the steering wheel and release it.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

The headlights and parking lights will illuminate

and remain on for 301, 60 or 90 seconds. The

time interval can be changed by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

1Factory setting

02 Instruments and controls

Right-side steering wheel lever

Windshield wipers

G026953

Thumb wheel

Rain sensor on/off

Windshield wipers off

If the lever is in the 0 position and

you move it upwards, the wipers

will sweep one stroke at a time for

as long as you hold the lever up.

Single sweep position

Move the lever slightly upward

from the 0 position for one sweep

of the wipers. The lever returns

automatically to 0 when released.

Intermittent wiper function

With the lever in this position, you

can set the wiper interval by twist-

ing the control ring (1) upward to

increase wiper speed or down-

ward to decrease the speed.

Windshield washer/headlight washer

(certain models)

When the lever is pulled to wash the wind-

shield, high pressure jets mounted in the

bumper will spray the headlights.

CAUTION

•Use ample washer fluid when washing

the windshield to avoid scratching the

glass. The windshield should be thor-

oughly wet when the wipers are in oper-

ation.

•Before using the wipers, ice and snow

should be removed from the wind-

shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper

blades are not frozen in place.

•To conserve washer fluid in driving condi-

tions where the windshield washers are

used frequently, the headlights will only be

washed once for every five times the wind-

shield is washed within a 10-minute period.

•A short pull on the lever will wash the wind-

shield only.

•When approximately 1 US quart (1 liter)

remains in the washer fluid reservoir, the

headlights will not be washed when the

lever is pulled to conserve washer fluid for

the windshield.

Continuous wiper function

Top arrow: normal speed

Bottom arrows: higher speed

02 Instruments and controls

Right-side steering wheel lever

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tailgate wiper/washer

G027127

Intermittent wiping: Press the upper

section of the switch

Neutral position: The wiper is switched

off

Normal (continuous) wiping: Press the

lower section of the switch

Move the lever forward to start the tailgate

washer. After washing the rear window, the

wiper will make several additional sweeps.

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear

If the front wipers are on and the transmission

is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper will

go into intermittent wiping function1.

If the tailgate wiper is already in normal wiping

function, the normal wiping function will con-

tinue.

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper

speed according to the amount of water on the

windshield.

The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted

by twisting ring (1) up (the wipers will sweep the

windshield more frequently) or down (the wip-

ers will sweep the windshield less frequently).

Activating the rain sensor:

1. Turn the ignition key to at least position I

and put the windshield wiper lever in posi-

tion 0.

2. Press button (2), see page 71.

> A light in the button will light up to indi-

cate that the rain sensor is active.

Deactivating the rain sensor:

•Press button (2), see page 71.

•Move the windshield wiper lever down to

another position. Moving the lever up will

not deactivate the rain sensor. Doing so

will cause the wipers to sweep the wind-

shield until the lever is released, at which

time the wipers return to rain sensor mode.

The rain sensor is also deactivated when the

key is removed from the ignition.

CAUTION

The rain sensor should be deactivated when

washing the vehicle in an automatic car

wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left

on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the

car wash and could be damaged.

1Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

02 Instruments and controls

Right-side steering wheel lever

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73

IR-reflecting windshield*

Section of the windshield where the IR-coating is

not applied

An optional factory-installed infrared (IR) coa-

ting can be applied to the windshield to help

protect the cabin from the sun's heat and the

fading effect of sunlight on upholstery, panels,

etc.

Electronic equipment such as garage door

openers, electronic toll tags and similar devi-

ces should not be placed on sections of the

windshield with the IR coating because this

could affect their function and limit their range.

For best performance, place the device on the

section of the windshield without the IR coating

(see the area marked in the illustration).

02 Instruments and controls

Hazard warning flashers

123

456

789

ABC DEF

GHI JKL MNO

PQRS TUV WXYZ

POWER

CD AM FM

G027096

The four-way flasher should be used to indi-

cate that the vehicle has become a traffic haz-

ard. To activate the flashers, press the triangu-

lar button in the center dash. Press the button

again to turn off the flashers.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the use of the hazard

warning flasher may vary, depending on

where you live.

Rear window and door mirror defroster

Press the switch to start heat-

ing the rear window and door

mirrors to remove ice or con-

densation. A light in the switch

will light up.

A timer automatically switches off the heating

after approximately 12 minutes. The LED will

go out correspondingly.

02 Instruments and controls

Trip computer

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75

Trip computer*

G026956

READ (press to acknowledge/confirm/

erase a message)

Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip

computer menus)

RESET

The trip computer stores information gathered

from several systems in your vehicle and has

four menus that can be displayed in the text

window.

•Driving distance on current fuel reserve

•Average fuel consumption

•Current fuel consumption

•Average speed

•Current speed in mph (Canadian models

only)

•DSTC (see page 152 for detailed informa-

tion)

NOTE

Warning messages from the vehicle's moni-

toring systems will override the trip com-

puter function. If a warning message is dis-

played in the text window while you are

using the trip computer, you must acknowl-

edge the message by pressing button A.

Press button A again to return to the trip

computer function.

1. Trip computer controls and functions

The trip computer functions can be accessed

by twisting INFO (B) one step at a time in either

direction. Twisting a final time returns you to

the original function.

The trip computer can be reset (current data

will be erased from system memory) by press-

ing RESET (button C).

2. Driving distance on current fuel

reserve

This function shows the approximate distance

that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the

tank. The calculation is based on average fuel

consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)

of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in

the tank when the reading was taken.

When "----" is displayed in the text window,

refuel as soon as possible.

3. Average fuel consumption

This value indicates fuel consumption since the

last time the trip computer was reset (by press-

ing RESET, button C). When the engine is

switched off, information on fuel consumption

is stored and remains in system memory until

the RESET (button C) is pressed again.

4. Current fuel consumption

This value indicates the current fuel consump-

tion, based on readings taken once per sec-

ond. When the vehicle is not moving, "----" will

be displayed.

5. Average speed

This value indicates average speed since the

last time the trip computer was reset (by press-

ing RESET, button C). When the engine is

switched off, information on average speed is

stored and remains in system memory until the

RESET (button C) is pressed again.

02 Instruments and controls

Trip computer

6. Current speed in miles per hour

(Canadian models only)

This function provides the driver with an instan-

taneous conversion of the vehicle's current

speed from km/h to mph.

NOTE

Trip computer readings may vary slightly

depending on the circumference of the tires

on the vehicle and driving style.

02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control

Engaging the cruise control function

G027098

The cruise control panel is located on the left

side of the steering wheel hub.

NOTE

This does not set the vehicle's speed.

1. Press the CRUISE button.

>CRUISE will be displayed in the infor-

mation window in the instrument panel.

2. Press + or – to set the current speed.

>CRUISE-ON will be displayed in the

information window in the instrument

panel.

Increasing or decreasing speed

G027139

Use + or – in the following ways to increase or

decrease the vehicle's speed:

1. Press and hold down + or – until the vehicle

reaches the desired speed.

2. Press + or – for approximately a half sec-

ond and release the button to increase or

decrease vehicle speed by approximately

1 mph (1.6 km/h).

NOTE

Cruise control will not function at speeds

below 20 mph. (30 km/h).

Braking

•Cruise control is automatically disengaged

when the brake pedal is depressed. The

currently set speed is stored in memory.

•Pressing resume will return the vehicle

to the previously set speed.

Acceleration

Momentary acceleration, such as when pass-

ing another vehicle, does not affect cruise con-

trol operation. The vehicle will automatically

return to the previously set speed when you

release the accelerator pedal.

Disengaging cruise control

To disengage cruise control, press the

CRUISE button. CRUISE or CRUISE-ON will

no longer be displayed in the information win-

dow in the instrument panel.

NOTE

Cruise control is automatically disengaged

if:

•the engine is switched off

•the gear selector is placed in (N) Neutral

•the wheels start to spin or lock

•if an increase in speed is maintained for

more than one minute

•if the vehicle's speed falls below

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control

Temporarily disengaging the cruise

control

1. Press 0 to temporarily disengage cruise

control.

>CRUISE will be displayed in the infor-

mation window in the instrument panel.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

Pressing "resume" causes the vehicle to

return to the previously set speed.

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavy

traffic or when driving on wet or slippery

roads, or when driving on unpaved or

uneven road surfaces. Cruise control may

not maintain set speed on steep down-

grades.

02 Instruments and controls

12-volt sockets

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

These 12 volt sockets can be used to plug in

certain accessories such as cellular tele-

phones, etc.

The ignition key must be in at least position I

for the sockets in the front seat and the optional

socket at the rear of the center console to func-

tion.

12-volt socket in the cargo compartment

Fold down the lid to use the socket. This socket

can be used even if the ignition is switched off.

NOTE

•If the 12-volt sockets are used while the

engine is not running, there is a risk that

the vehicle's battery will be discharged.

•If the ignition is switched off and a

device drawing more than 0.1 A is con-

nected to a socket, a battery warning

will be displayed in the text window.

•The covers should be kept on when the

auxiliary sockets are not in use.

•Maximum current from the sockets is

15 A.

G028425

12-volt socket at the rear of the center console*

Ashtrays/cigarette lighter

The auxiliary socket can also be used to power

a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lighters

and ashtrays can be purchased from your

Volvo retailer.

G027099

12-volt socket in the cargo compartment

02 Instruments and controls

Hood/tailgate

Opening/closing the hood

G026995

Opening the hood

1. Pull the lever located under the left side of

the dashboard to release the hood lock.

2. Lift the hood slightly.

3. Press up the release control located under

the front edge of the hood and lift.

To close the hood, place your hand on it and

press down until the hood locks in the closed

position.

WARNING

•Do not grasp the ribs in the grille when

closing the hood. If your fingers pro-

trude through the grille, they could be

injured on components in the engine

compartment as the grille closes. We

recommend pressing down on the hood

to close it.

•Check that the hood locks properly

when closed!

Opening the tailgate

G027005

To open the upper section of the tailgate, pull

the handle downward.

To fold down the lower section of the tailgate,

pull handle upward.

02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

The power windows are controlled by buttons

in the arm rests. The ignition switch must be

ON1 (ignition key in position I, II or the engine

running) for the electrically operated windows

to function.

To lower: Press down the front edge of the but-

ton to the first detent ("stop").

To raise: Lightly pull up the front edge of the

button to the first detent ("stop").

Auto up/down function (front doors only):

Either front door window can be opened or

closed automatically.

Auto down: Press the front part of the button

as far down as possible and release it immedi-

ately. To stop the window at any time, pull the

button up.

Auto up: Pull the front part of the button up as

far as possible and release it immediately. To

stop the window at any time, press the button

down.

G029571

Power window controls

Front windows

Rear windows

NOTE

If a window is obstructed during auto-up, it

will automatically reverse direction and

return to its starting position. If a window is

repeatedly obstructed during auto-up oper-

ation, an overload protection circuit breaker

will temporarily halt window function. The

window will return to normal function after a

brief cool-down period.

WARNING

Always remove the ignition key when the

vehicle is unattended.

Make sure that the windows are completely

unobstructed before they are operated.

Never leave children unattended in the vehi-

cle.

NOTE

To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear

windows are opened, also open the front

windows slightly.

G029572

1The power windows will also function after the ignition has been switched off as long as neither of the front doors has been opened.

02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

Lockout switch for rear windows

The power rear door windows can be disabled

by a switch located on the driver's door (see

illustration).

If the light in the switch is OFF: The rear door

windows can be raised or lowered with the

buttons on the rear door armrests or with the

buttons on the driver's door armrest.

If the light in the switch is ON: The rear door

windows can only be raised or lowered with the

buttons on the driver's door armrest.

G029573

Power window on the front passenger's

side

The control for the power window in the front

passenger's seat operates that window only.

G029574

Power windows in the rear doors

The rear door windows can be operated with

the control on each door and the switch on the

driver's door. If the light in the switch for block-

ing power windows in the rear doors (located

in the driver's door control panel) is on, the rear

door windows can only be operated from the

driver's door.

02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83

Rearview mirror

G026660

To reduce glare from the headlights of follow-

ing vehicles, use the control to switch between

the normal and night-driving positions.

Normal position

Night position, reduces glare from follow-

ing headlights

Autodim function*

The autodim function reacts to headlights from

following traffic and automatically reduces

glare.

NOTE

This function is automatically switched off

when the gear selector is placed in the

Reverse position.

Rearview mirror with compass*

G026965

The upper left-hand corner of the rearview mir-

ror has an integrated display that shows the

compass direction toward which the car is

pointing. Eight different directions can be dis-

played: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. The

display shows your car's orientation with

respect to true north.

If the compass is activated, it will be displayed

automatically when the ignition is in postilion II

or when the engine is running. The compass

can be switched off or on by pressing the inset

button on the rear side of the mirror (see the

inset illustration). This can be done with

straightened paperclip or similar object. The

button is recessed approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm)

in the mirror.

G026409

Magnetic zones

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The compass is initially set for the zone to

which the car was delivered, and should

always be adjusted if the car is driven to a new

magnetic zone. To do so:

1. Switch the ignition to position II.

02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

2. Press the button on the rear side of the

mirror with straightened paperclip or simi-

lar object for approximately 3 seconds until

ZONE is displayed. The number of the cur-

rent magnetic zone will also be displayed.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the num-

ber for the desired zone (1 – 15) is dis-

played.

G026950

Calibrating the compass

After several seconds, the compass heading

will again be displayed, and the change of

magnetic zones is complete.

Calibrating the compass

1. Stop the car in a large, open area, away

from traffic.

2. Turn off as many electrical devices in the

car as possible to avoid interference with

the compass (e.g. audio system, etc).

3. Using a pen or similar object, hold the but-

ton (on the rear side of the mirror)

depressed for at least 6 sec-

onds. "CAL" will be displayed.

4. Drive slowly in a circle at a maximum speed

of 5 m.p.h. (8 km/h) until CAL is no longer

displayed.

NOTE

This step can also be done by driving nor-

mally until CAL is no longer displayed.

Calibration is complete.

Power door mirrors

G029575

The mirror control switches are located on the

driver's door armrest.

Driver's side: Press the L button (a light in the

switch will light up) to activate the adjustment

control and then use this control to adjust the

driver's door mirror.

Passenger's door: Press the R button (a light

in the switch will light up) and then use the

adjustment control to adjust the passenger's

door mirror.

After you have adjusted the mirror(s), press the

L or R switch again (the light will go out) to

deactivate the adjustment control.

02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85

For information about the optional folding mir-

ror function see page 64.

WARNING

The mirrors should always be adjusted prior

to driving. Objects seen in the passenger's

side wide-angle door mirror are closer than

they appear to be.

Mirror memory function (with the central

locking system)*

If you lock the vehicle and later unlock it with

the same remote key and open the driver's

door, the door mirrors (and the driver's seat)

will automatically move to the position they

were in when you left the vehicle. This feature

will work in the same way with all of the remote

key transmitters (up to 3) that you use with your

vehicle. This feature will not function if you lock

your vehicle with the key.

Water repellent glass

The side door mirrors can be treated

with a water repellent coating. The

symbol to the left indicates these windows

have this coating.

The coating improves vision by causing the

water to run off quickly.

For information on cleaning this type of glass,

see page 202.

CAUTION

Use the heating function to remove ice,

snow, or mist from the mirrors.

02 Instruments and controls

Power moonroof

G007503

To operate the moonroof, turn the ignition key

to position I or II, or start the engine. The moon-

roof can be operated in two ways:

Tilt position

Sliding moonroof

G027010

Tilt position

Open: With the moonroof closed, push up the

rear edge of the switch (position 5 in the illus-

tration in the center column).

Close: Pull down and hold the rear edge of the

switch (position 6 in the illustration in the center

column) until the moonroof has closed com-

pletely.

Sliding moonroof

Manual open: Pull the switch rearward to posi-

tion 3 and hold it until the moonroof has

opened to the position of your choice.

Auto open: Pull the switch as far back as pos-

sible (position 4) and release it to automatically

slide open the moonroof to the "comfort"1

position. Pull the switch rearward again to

open the moonroof completely.

Manual close: Push the switch to position 2

and hold it until the moonroof has closed com-

pletely or to the position of your choice.

Auto close: Push the switch forward as far as

possible (position 1) and release it to automat-

ically close the moonroof.

CAUTION

•Remove ice and snow before opening

the moonroof.

•Do not operate the moonroof if it is fro-

zen closed.

•Never place heavy objects on the

moonroof.

1A position where the moonroof is not quite fully open, which helps alleviate "rumbling" wind noise.

02 Instruments and controls

Power moonroof

WARNING

•Never open/close the moonroof if it is

obstructed in any way when in opera-

tion.

•Never allow a child to operate the

moonroof.

•Never extend any object or body part

through the open moonroof, even if the

vehicle's ignition is completely

switched off.

•Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

If the moonroof is obstructed during auto-close

operation, it will automatically reverse direction

and return to its starting position. If the moon-

roof is repeatedly obstructed during auto-close

operation, an overload circuit breaker will tem-

porarily halt moonroof function. The moonroof

will return to normal function after a brief cool-

down period.

G020157

Sun visor

The optional moonroof also features a sliding

sun visor. The visor slides open automatically

when the moonroof is opened. The visor must

be closed manually.

WARNING

The moonroof must never be obstructed in

any way when in operation.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

G030070

The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro-

vides a convenient way to replace up to three

hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters

used to activate devices such as gate opera-

tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,

security systems, even home lighting. Addi-

tional HomeLink information can be found on

the Internet at www.homelink.com.

WARNING

•If you use HomeLink to open a garage

door or gate, be sure no one is near the

gate or door while it is in motion.

•When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park outside of

the garage.

•Do not use HomeLink with any garage

door opener that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by U.S.

federal safety standards (this includes

any garage door opener model manu-

factured before April 1, 1982). A garage

door that cannot detect an object - sig-

naling the door to stop and reverse -

does not meet current U.S. federal

safety standards. For more information,

contact HomeLink at:

www.homelink.com.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF device

you are programming for use in other vehicles

as well as for future HomeLink programming. It

is also suggested that upon the sale of the

vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be

erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing

HomeLink Buttons”.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE

Some vehicles may require the ignition

switch to be turned on or to the second

(“accessories”) position for programming

and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec-

ommended that a new battery be placed in

the hand-held transmitter of the device

being programmed to HomeLink for quicker

training and accurate transmission of the

radio-frequency signal.

1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-

mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the

HomeLink button you wish to program

while keeping the indicator light in view.

2. Simultaneously press and hold both the

chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit-

ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator

light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink-

ing light. Now you may release both the

HomeLink and hand-held transmitter but-

tons.

1HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89

NOTE

Some devices may require you to replace

this Programming Step 2 with procedures

noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-

gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica-

tor light does not change to a rapidly blink-

ing light after performing these steps, con-

tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink but-

ton up to two separate times to activate the

door. If the door does not activate, press

and hold the just-trained HomeLink button

and observe the indicator light.

•If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate when

the HomeLink button is pressed and

released.

•If the indicator light blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a con-

stant light continue with “Program-

ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro-

gramming of a rolling code equipped

device (most commonly a garage door

opener).

4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-

head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”

or “smart” button. This can usually be

found where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the motor-head unit.

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or

“smart” button. (The name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer.) There

are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold

for two seconds and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence a second

time, and, depending on the brand of the

garage door opener (or other rolling code

equipped device), repeat this sequence a

third time to complete the programming

process.

HomeLink should now activate your rolling

code equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-

mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-

eral seconds of transmission – which may not

be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the

signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are

designed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficul-

ties programming a gate operator or garage

door opener by using the “Programming” pro-

cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”

step 2 with the following:

•Continue to press and hold the HomeLink

button while you press and release -

every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-

held transmitter until the HomeLink indica-

tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly

blinking light. Now you may release both

the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter

buttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-

plete.

Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink button. Activation will

now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage

door opener, gate operator, security system,

entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For

convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the

device may also be used at any time. In the

event that there are still programming difficul-

ties or questions, contact HomeLink at:

www.homelink.com.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three Home-

Link buttons (individual buttons cannot be

erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined

below), follow the step noted:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons until the indicator light begins to

flash-after 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for

longer that 20 seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode

and can be programmed at any time beginning

with “Programming” - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink

Button

To program a device to HomeLink using a

HomeLink button previously trained, follow

these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-

ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-

Link button, proceed with “Programming”

- step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink

at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15

and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) This device must accept any

interference that may be received including

interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or

modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the

device.2

2The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

02 Instruments and controls

Climate control system – general information........................................ 94

Air distribution......................................................................................... 96

Electronic climate control (ECC)............................................................. 98

CLIMATE

03 Climate

Climate control system – general information

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Condensation on the inside of the

windows

Keeping the insides of the windows clean will

help reduce the amount of condensation that

forms on the windows. Use a commercial win-

dow cleaning agent to clean the windows.

Ice and snow

Always keep the air intake grille at the base of

the windshield free of snow.

Cabin air filter

Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at

the recommended intervals. Please refer to

your Warranty and Service Records Informa-

tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for these intervals.

The filter should be replaced more often when

driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The

filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should

always be replaced with a new one.

Sensors

The sunlight sensor on the dashboard and pas-

senger compartment temperature sensor in

the ECC control panel should not be covered

in any way as this could cause incorrect infor-

mation to be sent to the ECC system.

Parking the vehicle in warm weather

If your vehicle has been parked in the sun in

warm weather, opening the windows and

moonroof* for several minutes before driving

will help release the warm air from the passen-

ger compartment. When the engine is running,

close the windows and moonroof and use the

recirculation function for several minutes to

enable the air conditioning to cool the com-

partment as quickly as possible.

Windows and optional moonroof

The ECC system will function best if the win-

dows and optional moonroof are closed. If you

drive with the moonroof open, we recommend

that you manually adjust the temperature and

blower control (the LED in the AUTO switch

should be off).

Acceleration

The air conditioning is momentarily disen-

gaged during full-throttle acceleration.

Climate control maintenance

Special tools and equipment are required to

maintain and carry out repairs on the climate

system. Work of this type should only be done

by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

Refrigerant

Volvo cares about the environment. The air

conditioning system in your vehicle contains a

CFC-free refrigerant – R134a (HFC134a). This

substance will not deplete the ozone layer. The

approximate amount of R134a contained in the

system is a follows:

6-cylinder engine

Single A/C system: 1.5 lbs (700 g)

Dual1 A/C system: 2.2 lbs (1000 g)

8-cylinder engine

Single A/C system: 1.5 lbs (700 g)

Dual1 A/C system: 2.3 lbs (1050 g)

The system also uses PAG oil.

1Includes the optional rear A/C system

03 Climate

Climate control system – general information

Climate system blower

The climate system blower will be automati-

cally switched off when the engine is not run-

ning (even if the ignition key is in position I or

II) to avoid unnecessary battery drain. To acti-

vate the blower, turn the control to the desired

setting.

The climate system blower may start automat-

ically during a period of up to approximately

50 minutes after the ignition has been turned

off to remove condensation in the A/C evapo-

rator. It will run for 15 minutes and switch off

automatically.

Passenger compartment blower

Approximately 50 minutes after the ignition is

turned off, the blower may come on automati-

cally, and run for seven minutes, to remove

condensation in the A/C evaporator.

Blower function to reduce battery drain

The climate system's blower functions nor-

mally while the engine is running.

However, when the engine is switched off

(even if the ignition is switched to positions I or

II), the blower control will be automatically

switched off to avoid unnecessary battery

drain.

The following points pertain if the ignition is on

but the engine in not running:

•To restart the blower, turn the control knob

to the setting of your choice.

•After approximately 2 minutes, the blower

speed will be reduced to avoid battery

drain.

You can reset the blower speed at any time.

Please be aware that the system has been

designed to reduce the blower's speed again

after 2 minutes, until the engine is started.

If the battery becomes drained:

•LOW BATTERY, FAN IS REDUCED will

be displayed in the text window in the

instrument panel.

•The yellow warning light in the instrument

panel (see page 58) will also light up.

03 Climate

Air distribution

G027044

Air distribution

The incoming air is distributed through the ven-

tilation points in the passenger compartment

shown above.

G027043

Air vents in the dash

Open

Closed

Horizontal air flow

Vertical air flow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

G027064

Air vents in the door pillars

Open

Closed

Horizontal air flow

Vertical air flow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

03 Climate

Air distribution

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

Ventilated front seats*

G030244

Controls for ventilated front seats

The ventilation system consists of fans in the

seats and backrests that draw air through the

seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases

as the air in the passenger compartment

becomes cooler.

The level of ventilation is adjusted on the con-

trol panel on the side of the seat. The fans can

be set to three speeds.

To start seat ventilation:

Press briefly on .

To gradually increase ventilation:

Press briefly on .

For maximum ventilation:

Hold down for approximately 2 sec-

onds.

To gradually decrease ventilation:

Press briefly on .

To switch off ventilation:

Hold down for approximately 2 sec-

onds.

The ventilation can be used at the same time

as seat heating*, for example, to help dry damp

clothing.

NOTE

•Seat ventilation cannot be started if the

temperature in the passenger compart-

ment is below 41°F (5°C).

•Seat ventilation should be used with

caution by people who are sensitive to

drafts. A moderate ventilation level

should be set if the function is used for

extended periods.

03 Climate

Electronic climate control (ECC)

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Overview

AC – (ON/OFF)

Recirculation/Multifilter with sensor*

Recirculation

AUTO

Air distribution

Passenger compartment temperature sen-

sor

Defroster windshield and side windows

Rear window and door mirrors defroster

Heated front seats*

Temperature passenger´s side

Temperature driver´s side

Blower

Blower control for rear climate system*

Functions

A/C – ON/OFF

•The air conditioning functions only at tem-

peratures above 32°F (0°C).

•While the Defroster function is selected,

the air conditioning is temporarily activated

to dehumidify the air, even if you have man-

ually switched the air conditioning off. This

will only function if the blower is not

switched off.

Press the switch to turn the air conditioning on

or off. The "ON" or "OFF" LED will light up to

indicate if the system is switched on or off.

Other functions will still be regulated automat-

ically (if the AUTO switch is on).

Interior air quality sensor*

Some vehicles are equipped with a multifilter

and air quality sensor. The filter separates

gases and particles, thereby reducing the

amounts of odors and contaminants entering

the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects

increased levels of contaminants in the outside

air. When the air quality sensor detects conta-

03 Climate

Electronic climate control (ECC)

minated outside air, the air intake closes and

the air inside the passenger compartment is

recirculated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehi-

cle. The filter also cleans recirculated passen-

ger compartment air.

When the ECC system is in the AUTO mode,

the green LED will be on.

Recirculation

Press this switch to engage the recirculation

function (air in the passenger compartment

recirculates – no fresh air enters the compart-

ment). The LED in the switch will light up to

indicate that the function is engaged.

•Use this function if the outside air is con-

taminated with exhaust gases, smoke, etc

or to heat/cool the vehicle quickly.

•Recirculation should not be used for more

than 15 minutes. If your windows begin to

fog or mist, make sure that the recirculation

function is switched off.

•Selecting Defroster automatically

switches recirculation off.

•Timer mode activation: (Vehicles equipped

with the Interior Air Quality system have no

timer mode) Press and hold the recircula-

tion button for at least 3 seconds to acti-

vate a recirculation timer mode. The amber

LED in the recirculation button will flash 5

times to show that the timer mode is being

activated. In timer mode, each time the

recirculation button is pressed, the climate

control system will recirculate the air in the

passenger compartment for

5 – 12 minutes, depending on the outside

air temperature, and then revert back to

fresh air.

•Timer mode deactivation: Press and hold

the recirculation button for 3 seconds. The

amber LED in the recirculation button will

illuminate steadily for 5 seconds to show a

return to "normal" mode.

•In normal mode, when the recirculation

button is pressed, the climate control sys-

tem will recirculate the air in the passenger

compartment until the recirculation button

is pressed again.

•Timer mode memory: If the vehicle is

turned off while timer mode is active, timer

mode will still be active when the vehicle is

restarted.

AUTO

This function automatically regulates the

Electronic Climate Control system so that

the selected temperatures are maintained.

The blower, heating, air distribution (air

flow), air conditioning, and optional air qual-

ity sensor are controlled. If you prefer to man-

ually set any of these functions, the remaining

functions will still be controlled automatically.

Pressing the AUTO button overrides any set-

tings that were previously made manually.

Air distribution

G027267

•Air flow to windows

•Air through panel vents

•Air through floor vents

Press AUTO to automatically regulate air flow

or press any combination of the controls

shown in the illustration to manually adjust air

flow. An LED in the switch will light up if an air

flow control has been pressed.

Passenger compartment temperature

sensor

Measures the temperature in the compart-

ment.

Defroster

This function defrosts/deices the windshield

and front side windows. The LED in the switch

03 Climate

Electronic climate control (ECC)

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

will light up to indicate that the defrost function

is engaged.

•Blower speed increases automatically and

the air conditioning will switch on (if not

already on and if the passenger compart-

ment blower is not turned off) to dehumid-

ify the air in the passenger compartment.

•Recirculation will not function while defrost

is engaged.

The climate system will return to its previous

settings when the defroster function is

switched off.

Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

This function defrosts/deices the rear window

and door mirrors. The LED in the switch will

light up to indicate that the heating function is

engaged. For additional information on this

function see page 74.

Never use ice scrapers made of metal as they

can easily scratch the mirror surface.

Heated front seats*

1. Press the switch once for maximum seat

heating. Both LEDs in the switch will be lit.

2. Press the switch a second time for comfort

heating. One LED in the switch will be lit.

3. Press the switch a third time to turn the

heating off completely. The LED will go off.

The seat heating for the passenger seat should

be switched off when the seat is not occupied.

Heated rear seats (XC90 Executive*)

G030976

Button for rear seat heating

Heating for the respective outboard rear seats

can be switched on or off with buttons on either

side of the center console (see the illustration).

To switch on rear seat heating:

Press the button.

> The symbol in the button will illuminate.

To switch off rear seat heating:

Press the button.

> The symbol in the button will go out.

Temperature

These controls are used to individually set the

temperature for both sides of the passenger

compartment. Please note that the compart-

ment will not be heated or cooled faster by set-

ting the temperature higher or lower than nec-

essary.

Set the control to the temperature you prefer.

Blower control

Turn the control clockwise to increase or coun-

terclockwise to decrease the blower speed.

Pressing the AUTO switch will automatically

regulate blower speed and override manual

adjustment.

Turning the blower control counterclockwise

until an orange LED comes on will turn both the

blower and the air conditioning off.

Blower control for rear climate

system*

Turn the control to increase or decrease blower

speed.

1See also see page 94.

03 Climate

Electronic climate control (ECC)

101

Operation

Press to operate the air quality sensor (normal

setting).

or:

Select one of the following three functions by

pressing 1, 2 or 3 times.

1. The AUT LED lights. The air quality sensor

is now activated.

2. No LED lights. Recirculation is not acti-

vated unless needed to cool the passenger

compartment in a warm climate.

3. The MAN LED lights. Recirculation is now

activated.

Keep in mind the following:

•Make it a rule to have the air quality sensor

activated at all times.

•Recirculation is limited in cold climates to

avoid fogging.

•If window fogging occurs, you should

deactivate the air quality sensor. Also use

the defroster functions for the windshield,

side windows and rear window, see

page 98.

•The filter should be changed at the inter-

vals recommended in the service sched-

ule. However, if the vehicle is used in a

severely contaminated environment, it may

be necessary to change the filter more fre-

quently.

102

Front seats............................................................................................ 104

Rear seats............................................................................................. 108

Interior lighting...................................................................................... 111

Storage compartments......................................................................... 113

Securing cargo...................................................................................... 118

INTERIOR

04 Interior

Front seats

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Manually adjusted front seats

G027214

Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and

move the seat to the position of your

choice.

Raise/lower the front edge of the seat

cushion*: use the control to pump the front

edge of the cushion up or down.

Raise/lower seat height: pump the seat up

or down.

Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer

or softer lumbar support.

Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the

angle of the backrest.

Control panel for optional power seat (see

page 105 for more information).

WARNING

•Do not adjust the seat while driving. The

seat should be adjusted so that the

brake pedal can be depressed fully. In

addition, position the seat as far rear-

ward as comfort and control allow.

•Check that the seat is securely locked

into position after adjusting.

Folding the backrests in the front seat

G014805

The front passenger seat backrest can be

folded to a horizontal position to make room for

a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:

1. Move the seat as far back as possible.

2. Adjust the backrest to the upright position.

3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest.

4. Without releasing the catches, push the

backrest forward.

5. Move the seat as far forward as possible

so that the head restraint slides under the

glove compartment.

WARNING

•When transporting long objects, cover

sharp edges on the load to help prevent

injury to occupants. Secure the load to

help prevent shifting during sudden

stops.

•When the seat's backrest is returned to

the upright position, push and pull it to

be sure that it is securely locked in this

position.

04 Interior

Front seats

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

Power seat*

Operation

Driver's seat: The seat can be adjusted if the

ignition key is in position I, II or if the engine is

running. It can also be adjusted as follows with

the ignition off:

•Within several minutes after the driver's

door has been unlocked from the outside,

has been opened, and remains open.

•Within a short period if the driver's door has

just been closed.

•Within a short period if the driver's door has

not been opened after the ignition has

been switched off.

Passenger seat: The seat can only be

adjusted if the ignition key is in position I, II or

if the engine is running.

G027036

Power seat adjustment controls

Seat adjustment

Adjust the power seat(s) with the two controls

at the side of the seat as follows:

Front edge of seat (raise/lower)

Forward – rearward

Rear edge of seat (raise/lower)

Backrest tilt

NOTE

The power seats have an overload protector

that activates if a seat is blocked by any

object. If this occurs, switch off the ignition

(key in position 0 ) and wait for a short period

before operating the seat again.

Emergency stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, press

any of the buttons to stop the seat.

NOTE

Please refer to the following page for infor-

mation on programming the memory func-

tion in the driver's seat.

Remote keyless entry system and the

driver's seat

The remote key transmitter also controls the

position of the electrically operated driver's

seat in the following way:

•Adjust the seat to your preferences.

•When you leave your vehicle, lock it using

the remote key.

The position of the seat is now stored in the

remote key.

Automatic seat adjustment

To move the seat to the position in which you

left it:

04 Interior

Front seats

106

1. Unlock the driver's door with the same

remote key (the one used to lock the doors)

2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.

The driver's seat will automatically move to the

position in which you left it.

NOTE

•The seat will move to this position even

if someone else has moved it to a dif-

ferent seating position and locked the

vehicle with a different remote key.

•This feature will work in the same way

with all of the remote key transmitters

(up to 3 ) that you use with your vehicle.

•This feature will not function if you lock

your vehicle with the key.

WARNING

•Because the driver's seat can be

adjusted with the ignition off, children

should never be left unattended in the

vehicle.

•Movement of the seat can be STOPPED

at any time by pressing any button on

the power seat control panel.

•Do not adjust the seat while driving.

•The seat should be adjusted so that the

brake pedal can be depressed fully. In

addition, position the seat as far rear-

ward as comfort and control allow.

•The seat rails on the floor must not be

obstructed in any way when the seat is

in motion.

G027037

Programming the memory

Three different seating and door mirror posi-

tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.

The following example explains how button 1

can be programmed. Buttons 2 and 3 can be

programmed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat position in button 1:

1. Move the seat to the desired position using

the seat adjustment controls (see

page 104).

2. Press and hold down the MEM (memory)

button.

04 Interior

Front seats

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

3. With the MEM button depressed, press

button 1 briefly to store the seat's current

position.

To move the seat to the position that it was in

when button 1 was programmed:

Press and hold down button 1 until the seat

stops moving.

As a safety precaution, the seat will stop auto-

matically if the button is released before the

seat has reached the preset position.

Front seats*

G030180

Massage

Lumbar support

Massage

G030183

Massage control

Firm massage

Gentle massage

Each front seat has a massage function in its

backrest. The massage action is done with air

cushions, which can be adjusted to a firm or

gentle setting. When the setting has been

made, the massaging action is carried out in

cycles as follows: massage 6 minutes – pause

4 minutes – massage 6 minutes, etc.

When the button is in the center position or if

the ignition is in position 0, the massage func-

tion is switched off.

Lumbar support

G030229

Lumbar support control

The lumbar support uses the same air cushions

as the massage function. The button can be

used to adjust the amount of support in four

directions, as shown in the illustration.

Lumbar support can be only be adjusted when

the massage function is switched off.

A memory function stores the lumbar support

setting and this support will resume after the

massage function has been switched off or

after the vehicle has been parked for an

extended period of time.

04 Interior

Rear seats

108

Entering the third row of seats

G027027

Tilting the outboard backrests in the

second row of seats:

•Pull up the handle (1), hold it up, and tilt the

backrest forward to move the seat.

•Return the backrest to the upright position

to slide the seat back to its original posi-

tion.

Forward/rearward seat adjustment

Lift the adjustment bar (2) to move the seat for-

ward or rearward.

Removing the center console1

G028445

In order to make it possible to move the center

seat in the second row of seats as far forward

as possible (seven-seat models only), the rear

section of the center console can be removed.

•Pull the handle (see illustration) and lift out

the console.

•To return the console to its original posi-

tion, slide it back into position until it clicks

into place.

G027033

Sliding center seat – second row (seven-

seat models only)

The center seat in the second row can be

moved farther forward than the outboard

seats. This makes it possible for a child seated

in this position to sit closer to the people in the

front seats.

1The center console cannot be removed on vehicles equipped with the optional Rear Seat Entertainment System.

04 Interior

Rear seats

109

G027015

Head restraint – second row, center

position

The head restraint in the center position can be

adjusted to 4 different heights.

To raise – pull the restraint up until it clicks into

one of the four heights positions.

To lower – press the button at the base of the

support (see illustration above) and press the

head restraint down.

WARNING

The center rear seat head restraint should

only be in its lowest position when this seat

is NOT occupied. When the center position

is occupied, the head restraint should be

correctly adjusted to the passenger’s

height. The upper edge of the head restraint

should be at least on a level with the upper-

most point of the seat occupant's ear.

G027022

Folding the backrests – second row of

seats

CAUTION

To help avoid damage to the upholstery,

there should be no objects on the rear seat

and the seat belt should not be buckled

when the backrest is folded down.

1. Move the seat(s) to their rearmost position

(seven-seat models only).

2. Pull the loop to fold down an outboard

head restraint. Press down the center head

restraint if necessary (see page 109).

04 Interior

Rear seats

110

3. Pull the handle (1) outward to release the

backrest. The backrests are designed to

lock at a 45 degree angle. Pull the handle

again to continue pressing it down until it

locks in the horizontal position.

To return the backrests to the upright position,

pull handle 1 and pull the backrest up.

G027016

Folding the backrests—third row of

seats

Folding down the backrest

If necessary, fold in the load anchorage eyelets

before folding down the backrests.

1. Move the seats in the second row as far

forward as possible, see page 108.

2. Pull up the handle, illustration 1 above.

3. Push the seat cushion firmly rearward,

under the backrest.

4. Fold down the backrests2 (the head

restraints fold down automatically) to the

horizontal position.

WARNING

The seats in the third row are not equipped

with top tether anchors or ISOFIX/LATCH

lower child seat anchors. Child restraint sys-

tems should never be used on these seats.

Returning the backrest to the upright

position

1. Fold up the backrest to the upright posi-

tion.

2. Grasp the strap (see illustration 3 above)

and pull the seat cushion out until it locks

in place. This also locks the backrest in the

upright position.

WARNING

•When one or more sections of the back-

rest is returned to the upright position,

check that it is properly locked in place

by pushing and pulling it. The red indi-

cators should also not be visible.

•Return the outboard head restraints to

the upright position.

•Long loads should always be securely

anchored to help avoid injury in the

event of a sudden stop.

•Always turn the engine off and apply the

parking brake when loading/unloading

the vehicle.

•Place the transmission in the Park (P)

position to help prevent inadvertent

movement of the gear selector.

•On hot days, the temperature in the

vehicle interior can rise very quickly.

Exposure of people to these high tem-

peratures for even a short period of time

can cause heat-related injury or death.

Small children are particularly at risk.

2Please note that the head restraints in this row cannot be vertically adjusted.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

111

Reading lights and courtesy light

G026960

Driver's side front reading lamp

Courtesy lights

Passenger's side front reading lamp The

reading lights can be switched on or off by

pressing buttons 1 or 3. The courtesy light-

ing (including footwell lighting) can be

turned on or off by pressing button 2. This

also activates the automatic function.

G027153

Rear reading lights

Driver's side rear reading light

Passenger's side rear reading light The

rear reading lights can be switched on and

off by pressing buttons (4) or (5).

Automatic function

The reading lights and courtesy lights will

switch off automatically approximately

10 minutes after the engine has been turned

off. The lights can be turned off sooner by

pressing the respective buttons.

The courtesy lights come on automatically1

and remain on for approximately 30 seconds

when:

•The vehicle has been unlocked from the

outside with the remote key or key

•If the engine has been switched off and the

ignition key has been turned to position 0

The courtesy lights will come on and remain on

for approximately 10 minutes when:

•One of the doors is opened (assuming the

courtesy lighting has not previously been

switched off)

The courtesy lighting will go off when:

•The engine is started

•The vehicle is locked from the outside with

the remote key or key blade.

The automatic function can be disconnected

by pressing button (2) for more than 3 seconds.

Briefly pressing the button again automatically

reconnects the function.

The courtesy light timer periods can be

changed. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

1This function is light dependent and is only activated in dark conditions.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

112

Vanity mirror

G027045

The light comes on when you open the cover.

Glove compartment lighting

The light in the glove compartment comes on

or switches off when its door is opened or

closed.

04 Interior

Storage compartments

113

G033089

04 Interior

Storage compartments

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Storage compartment in third row of seats

Storage compartment

Glove compartment

Storage compartment in center console

Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket (also in front edge of front

seats)

Grocery bag holder*

WARNING

Make sure that no hard, sharp or heavy

objects lie on or in any of the storage areas

where they might cause injury during sud-

den braking.

Storage compartment in the center

console

G027019

To open the lid on the storage compartment,

press the lower edge of the opening latch (see

illustration above). This lid can be folded back

to form a small table area for rear seat passen-

gers.

Lift the tray under the lid to expose the deep

storage bin with slots for CD storage.

G027020

Cup holders for the front seats

Two cup holders are provided for the front seat

occupants. Press lightly on the rear edge of the

cover to open it.

Ashtray (accessory)

An ashtray insert is available from your Volvo

retailer. This insert slides into either of the cup

holders.

Pen holder

There is a pen holder in the center console, in

front of the gear selector.

04 Interior

Storage compartments

115

G027018

Storage compartment in rear side of the

center console

Grasp the upper edge of cover and pull to open

this compartment.

Ashtray (accessory)

An ashtray insert is available from your Volvo

retailer.

G027063

Cup holders for the rear seats

•Grasp the lower edge of the panel to pull

out the cup holders in the rear side of the

center console.

•The cup holder insert can be removed to

provide space for a large plastic bottle. Pull

the insert straight up to remove it. Press

down to reinsert it.

ATTENTION

Pakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi

SOUND

ENTER

EXIT

MY KEY

AIRBAG

G027025

Glove compartment

The glove compartment can be used to store

things such as the owner's manual, maps,

pens, etc.

04 Interior

Storage compartments

116

G027028

Coat hanger

The jacket hanger is located on the inboard

side of the front passenger's seat head

restraint. It is only intended for hanging light

garments.

G027026

Storage space between rear seats

This storage space provides compartments for

pens or other small items.

G027040

Rear side storage compartments and

cup holders (seven-seat models)

Lift the lid to access the storage compartment.

04 Interior

Storage compartments

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117

Refrigerator*

G027068

The refrigerator is located under the cover in

the front seat center armrest. Use the button

(see the inset illustration) to adjust the level of

cooling.

The refrigerator functions when the engine is

running or when the ignition is in position II.

WARNING

Bottles kept in the refrigerator should be

firmly sealed and the cover over the refrig-

erator must be securely closed while the

vehicle is in motion.

04 Interior

Securing cargo

118

G027031

As a safety precaution, all cargo in your vehicle

should be securely anchored to keep it from

being thrown forward in the event of sudden

braking, etc. The vehicle is equipped with eye-

lets in the cargo space to which straps or other

cargo restraints can be attached.

WARNING

The eyelets are not to be used as passenger

restraints or as anchorages for child

restraints.

Consult your Volvo retailer about suitable

accessories for this purpose.

Remember that an object weighing 44 lbs

(20 kg) produces a force of 2,200 lbs

(1,000 kg) in a head-on collision at 30 mph

(50 km/h)!

Keep the following in mind when loading the

vehicle:

•The load carrying capacity of your vehicle

is determined by factors such as the num-

ber of passengers, the amount of cargo,

the weight of any accessories that may be

installed, etc. See the section "Vehicle

loading" in the chapter "Wheel and tires"

for more detailed information.

•Load the cargo against the backrest.

•Load heavy cargo as low as possible.

•If no one is sitting in the outboard rear

seat(s), reinforce the backrest by fastening

the seat belts.

•Never load cargo above the backrest with-

out a cargo net.

WARNING

When the rear backrest(s) are folded down,

the vehicle should not be loaded to a level

higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper

edge of the rear side windows. Objects

placed higher than this level could impede

the function of the inflatable curtain.

G027058

Attachment bracket

Nylon cargo net (accessory)

The Volvo XC90 can be equipped with a cargo

net made of strong nylon fabric.

This net can be installed in two places:

•Behind the rear seat backrests (the second

row of seats in seven-seat models)

•Behind the front seat backrests if the rear

seat backrests (the second row of seats in

seven-seat models) have been folded

down.

04 Interior

Securing cargo

119

Attachment eyelet in front seat rail

If the vehicle is equipped with the cargo area

cover, lift the cover out of the vehicle before

installing the cargo net.

1. The upper and lower rods of the cargo net

are hinged. Position the rods so that they

are straight and lock in position.

2. Insert the end of the upper rod in one of the

attachment brackets (see illustration in the

left column).

3. Insert the other end of the rod in the attach-

ment bracket on the opposite side of the

vehicle.

NOTE

On seven-seat models: When using the net

in the rear attachment brackets, be sure it is

installed in front of the side armrests.

4. Attach the lower straps to the eyelets on

the floor if the net has been installed in the

rear attachment brackets. Use the eyelets

in the front seat rails if the net has been

installed in the forward attachment brack-

ets.

5. Adjust the straps to pull the net taut.

Folding and storing the cargo net

Press the release buttons on the hinges (1 in

the illustration) and fold the net.

The cargo net can be stored under the floor of

the cargo area on five-seat models.

WARNING

•Be sure the cargo net is properly

inserted in the attachment brackets and

the straps are correctly attached to the

eyelets and pulled taut.

•Do not use the net if it is damaged in any

way.

•When it is not in use, store the net so

that it cannot be thrown forward in the

event of sudden braking, etc.

G027056

Upper attachments

04 Interior

Securing cargo

120

Steel grid (accessory)

Installing the grid, upper attachments

1. Lift in the grid through the tailgate or

through one of the rear passenger doors (in

this case, fold down the rear seat backr-

ests/backrests in second row of seats in

seven-seat models).

2. Insert one of the grid's upper attachments

into an attachment bracket above one of

the rear passenger doors (see illustration

above).

3. Push the grid's attachment into the forward

position in the attachment bracket (see

inset illustration above) to lock the attach-

ment in place.

G027057

Lower attachments

4. Insert the grid's other upper attachment in

the attachment bracket above the oppo-

site rear passenger door, and press the

attachment into the forward position in the

attachment bracket to lock it in place.

Installing the grid, lower attachments

1. Insert the lower attachment bracket

through the steel grid's lower mount from

underneath.

2. Install the spring on the attachment

bracket and tighten the knob.

3. Secure the attachment bracket hook in the

lower cargo eyelet. Turn the knob to ten-

sion the attachment bracket in the cargo

eyelet.

4. Repeat the operation on the opposite side.

5. Tighten both attachment brackets alterna-

tively.

6. Place the protective caps on the threads

above the knobs.

WARNING

•The backrests of the third row seats

must be folded down when installing

the steel grid.

•The steel grid is installed behind the

second row of seats. To avoid the risk

of injury, no one should be allowed to sit

in the third row of seats when the steel

grid is in place in the vehicle.

04 Interior

Securing cargo

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121

G027055

Cargo area cover*

Installing the cargo area cover:

1. Press the end pieces of the cargo area

cover down in the holders.

2. Pull out the cargo area cover and hook it in

the holes in the rear cargo area pillars (see

illustration above).

Removing the cargo area cover:

1. Press the end pieces of the cover inward.

2. Pull up and lift out.

G027066

Grocery bag holder

1. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate.

2. Fold up the rear section of the cargo com-

partment floor.

3. Hang or secure your grocery bags by

means of the straps or holders.

122

Remote keys and key blades................................................................ 124

Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 128

Child safety locks.................................................................................. 130

Alarm..................................................................................................... 131

LOCKS AND ALARM

05 Locks and alarm

Remote keys and key blades

124

Key blades

G030177

Your vehicle is equipped with two coded

remote key transmitters with integrated ignition

key blades called Key Integrated Remote (KIR).

To unlock/lock the vehicle using the key blade:

•Insert the key blade in the driver's door lock

and turn it once to unlock the driver's door

only.

•Turn the key blade again (within 10 sec-

onds) to unlock all doors and the tailgate.

•Turn the key blade once in the opposite

direction to lock all doors and the tailgate.

Use the switch on the driver's door armrest to

lock/unlock the vehicle from the inside.

WARNING

If the doors are locked while driving, this

may hinder rapid access to the occupants

of the vehicle in the event of an accident.

(Also see information on "Child safety

locks".)

NOTE

To help prevent accidentally locking the

keys in the vehicle, the central locking sys-

tem is designed to unlock the doors imme-

diately if the key is left in the ignition switch,

the vehicle is locked using the lock button

on the door and the door is then closed. A

sound from the lock will be audible at this

time.

Please note that this function will not unlock

the doors if the engine is running.

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)

Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle

contains a coded transmitter. The code in the

key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition

switch where it is compared to the code stored

in the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will

start only with a properly coded key.

Each key has a unique code, which your Volvo

retailer uses if new keys are required. A maxi-

mum of six remote keys can be programmed

and used for one vehicle.

If you misplace a key, take the other keys to an

authorized Volvo retailer for reprogramming as

an antitheft measure.

If two of the keys to your vehicle are close

together, e.g., on the same key ring, when you

try to start the vehicle, this could cause inter-

ference in the immobilizer system and result in

the vehicle not starting. If this should occur,

remove one of the keys from the key ring before

trying to start the vehicle again.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing condition: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

05 Locks and alarm

Remote keys and key blades

125

Remote keys

G026963

Your vehicle is equipped with two coded

remote key transmitters with integrated ignition

keys called Key Integrated Remote (KIR).

The remote key transmitters will also activate

or allow "keyless" entry into the passenger

compartment or the tailgate. These transmit-

ters use a radio frequency that will enable you

to lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate from a

distance of 10 – 15 feet (3 – 5 meters). They will

also activate or deactivate your vehicle's alarm

system(s). The vehicle can also be locked/

unlocked with the key.

If either of the remote keys is lost, the other

should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer.

As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost

remote key must be erased from the system.

NOTE

Additional or duplicate remote control keys

can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo

Retailer.

You can also obtain additional or duplicate

remote control keys from certain independ-

ent repair facilities and locksmiths that are

qualified to make remote control keys. Each

key must be programmed to work with your

vehicle.

California Only:

A list of independent repair facilities and/or

locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and

code replacement keys can be found:

•on the Volvo website at

http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys

•by calling Volvo Customer Care at

1-800-458-1552

G027013

Unlock

Unlock tailgate

"Panic" function

Approach lighting

Lock

Fold key blade in/out

Using the remote key

Unlock

Press this button once to unlock the driver's

door only. Wait for at least 1 second and press

the button again (within 10 seconds) to unlock

all doors, and the tailgate.

05 Locks and alarm

Remote keys and key blades

126

Tailgate unlock

Press this button to unlock the tailgate (without

unlocking the other doors). This function will

not open the tailgate.

Panic function

For more information on this function, see

page 131.

Approach lighting

Press this button when approaching the vehi-

cle at night to light up the interior courtesy light,

parking lights, license plate lights and the lights

in the door mirrors.

Lock

Press once to lock all doors, and the tailgate.

Fold key blade in/out

Press to extend the key blade. This button

must also be pressed when the key blade is

folded back into the slot in the side of the

remote key unit.

NOTE

•If an airbag deploys, your vehicle's SRS

control module will attempt to automat-

ically unlock all doors.

•The key blade may also be used to lock

and unlock the doors, and to activate

and deactivate the alarm system.

•To avoid leaving your keys in the vehi-

cle, make a habit of always locking the

vehicle with the remote key.

•If the key blade section of the remote is

not fully folded out when starting the

vehicle, the immobilizer function may

make it impossible to start the engine.

•The vehicle can be locked even if a door

is open. When the door(s) are closed,

they will be locked. Please be aware

that the keys could be locked in the car

when this is done.

Automatic re-locking

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-

matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will

rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tail-

gate has been opened. This helps prevent the

car from inadvertently being left unlocked.

FCC ID: LQNP2T-APU

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following con-

ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

Canadian 2306104388

Model 504 2927 by Donnelly

Operation is subject to the following condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

Canadian 2306104388A

Model 509 977 by Connaught Electronics

Operation is subject to the following condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

05 Locks and alarm

Remote keys and key blades

127

WARNING

Never use the transmitter to lock the doors

from inside the vehicle.

•Doing so would ACTIVATE:

•the break-in alarm, which would sound

if one of the doors were opened

•the optional interior motion and inclina-

tion alarm sensors.

•Doing so would DEACTIVATE:

•the moonroof and interior courtesy light

controls.

•the central locking buttons on the front

door armrests, although the interior

door handles would still function to

allow occupants to leave the vehicle.

•Disabled features would remain disa-

bled until the remote is used again to

unlock the vehicle.

•In addition, locking an occupied vehicle

would hinder rapid access to the occu-

pants in an accident or emergency.

Replacing the battery in the remote key

If the range of the transmitter is noticeably

reduced, this indicates that the battery is weak

and should be replaced.

To replace the battery:

1. Carefully pry open the rear edge of the

cover with a small screwdriver.

2. Insert a new 3-volt, CR2032 battery, with

the battery's plus side up. Avoid touching

the contact surfaces of the battery with

your fingers.

3. Press the cover back into place. Ensure

that the rubber seal is correctly positioned

to help keep out moisture.

NOTE

The old battery should be disposed of prop-

erly at a recycling center or at your Volvo

retailer.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

128

G029646

Locking and unlocking the vehicle from

the inside

The switch on the driver's door armrest can be

used to lock or unlock all doors and the tail-

gate, and to set the alarm.

Each door can also be locked with the lock

button on the respective door and opened by

pulling the door handle on the door.

Automatic locking

The function locks the doors automatically

when the vehicle's speed exceeds approxi-

mately 5 mph (7 km/h). The doors will then

remain locked until a door in opened from the

inside or if all of the doors are unlocked from

the control panel in the driver's door.

This function can be activated/deactivated

from the control panel in the driver's door.

Activating/deactivating automatic

locking

1. Turn the ignition key to position I or II.

2. Press the READ button on the left-side

steering wheel lever to erase any mes-

sages that may be displayed in the infor-

mation display.

3. Depress the central locking button on the

control panel until a new message about

the locking status is displayed.

The message AUTOLOCK ON (the doors will

be locked when the vehicle begins to move) or

AUTOLOCK OFF will be displayed.

ATTENTION

Pakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi

SOUND

ENTER

EXIT

MY KEY

AIRBAG

G027025

Locking the glove compartment

The glove compartment can be locked with the

master key.

G028485

Unlocking the tailgate

The tailgate lock is incorporated in the central

locking system and is locked or unlocked when

all doors are locked/unlocked.

The tailgate can be unlocked by:

•Pressing UNLOCK on the remote key

twice.

•Using the central locking button on the

driver's door.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

129

•Pressing the remote key's tailgate unlock

button (see the illustration).

•Relock the tailgate using the remote's

LOCK button.

Automatic relocking

If you use the tailgate unlock button to unlock

the tailgate without opening it, it will automati-

cally relock after approximately 2 minutes.

NOTE

If you open the tailgate and close it again, it

will remain unlocked and the alarm will not

be rearmed. Press the lock button on the

remote key to relock the tailgate and rearm

the alarm.

05 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G021513

Child safety locks in the rear doors

Manual child safety locks – rear doors/

tailgate

The controls are located on the rear door jambs

and at the lower edge of the tailgate. Use a key

or small screwdriver to adjust these controls.

The door/tailgate cannot be opened

from the inside. The door/tailgate can be

opened from the outside.

The door/tailgate locks function nor-

mally.

G021512

Child safety lock in the tailgate

WARNING

Remember, in the event of an accident, the

rear seat passengers cannot open the doors

from the inside with the buttons in position

REAR

G027105

Power child locks*

To prevent the rear doors from being opened

from the inside:

1. Turn the vehicle's ignition key to at least

position 1.

2. Press the button shown above.

Indicator light in the button ON: the doors

cannot be opened from the inside. Normal

operation from the outside.

Indicator light in the button OFF: the doors

can be opened from the inside.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm

131

The alarm is automatically armed whenever

you lock your vehicle.

When armed, the alarm continuously monitors

a number of points on the vehicle. The follow-

ing conditions will set off the alarm:

•The hood is forced open.

•The tailgate is forced open.

•A door is forced open.

•The ignition switch is tampered with.

•If there is movement in the passenger com-

partment (if the vehicle is equipped with

the optional movement sensor).

•The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle

is equipped with the optional inclination

sensor).

•The battery is disconnected (while the

alarm is armed).

•The siren is disconnected when the alarm

is disarmed.

Arming the alarm

1. Press the LOCK button on the remote key.

2. Lock the vehicle using the key blade in the

driver's door or press the central lock but-

ton on the driver's door with the door open.

One long flash of the turn signals will confirm

that the alarm is armed.

Disarming the alarm

Press the UNLOCK button on the remote key

or unlock the doors with the key blade.

Turning off (stopping) the alarm

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by

pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote

key or by unlocking the driver's door with the

key blade.

Visual alarm signal

The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all

turn signals and turning on the interior lighting

for approximately 5 minutes.

Audible alarm signal

An audible alarm signal is given by a battery

powered siren. One alarm cycle lasts for

25 seconds.

"Panic" button

In an emergency situation, this feature can be

used to attract attention.

Activate the "panic" button by pressing the red

button on the remote key ( see page 125 for

illustration) for at least 3 seconds or by press-

ing this button twice within 3 seconds. The turn

signals will flash, and the vehicle's horn will

sound.

The function can be turned off by pressing any

of the buttons on the remote key or will stop

automatically after 25 seconds. When a button

is pressed, there is a 5 second delay before the

panic alarm is deactivated.

NOTE

This button will NOT unlock the vehicle.

LED alarm status signals

The status of the alarm system is indicated by

the red LED at the top of the dash:

•LED off – the alarm is not armed

•LED flashes once per second – the alarm

is armed

•LED flashes rapidly before the ignition is

switched on – the alarm has been triggered

•Fault in the alarm system: If a fault has

been detected in the alarm system, a mes-

sage will be displayed in the text window.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician.

Automatic re-lock/re-arm system

If the vehicle is unlocked with the remote, the

vehicle will re-lock and the alarm will re-arm

after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has

been opened.

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information............................................................................... 134

Fuel requirements................................................................................. 135

Refueling............................................................................................... 137

Starting the vehicle............................................................................... 139

Ignition switch and steering wheel lock................................................ 141

Economical driving................................................................................ 142

Difficult driving conditions..................................................................... 143

Automatic transmission........................................................................ 144

Jump starting........................................................................................ 147

All Wheel Drive*..................................................................................... 148

Brake system........................................................................................ 149

Parking brake........................................................................................ 151

Stability system..................................................................................... 152

Front/rear park assist*........................................................................... 154

Towing.................................................................................................. 156

Towing a trailer...................................................................................... 158

Detachable trailer hitch......................................................................... 161

Load carriers (accessory)...................................................................... 162

Cold weather precautions..................................................................... 163

Before a long distance trip.................................................................... 164

Blind Spot Information System*............................................................ 165

STARTING AND DRIVING

06 Starting and driving

General information

134

Engine oil

Although some oil consumption occurs during

normal engine operation, more oil is consumed

when the engine is new as the internal parts

generate higher friction while wearing-in to

each other. From the time the engine is new

until the first maintenance is performed, the oil

consumption could be higher than normal. For

this reason, it is especially important to check

the oil regularly during this period, see

page 215.

Fuel requirements

Deposit control gasoline (detergent

additives)

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-

oline to control engine deposits. Detergent

gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and

intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit

control gasolines will help ensure good driva-

bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure

whether the gasoline contains deposit control

additives, check with the service station oper-

ator.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of exter-

nal fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel

Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter

and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and

Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv-

ering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEA-

DED". Only these pumps have nozzles which

fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis-

pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled

"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline

damages the three-way catalytic converter and

the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated

use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-

ness of the emission control system and could

result in loss of emission warranty coverage.

State and local vehicle inspection programs

will make detection of misfueling easier, pos-

sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis-

fueled vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain

an octane enhancing additive called methyl-

cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission

Control System performance may be affec-

ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc-

tion indicator lamp) located on your instru-

ment panel may light. If this occurs, please

return your vehicle to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for maintenance.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers

"Oxygenated fuels"

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or

ethers. In some areas, state or local laws

require that the service pump be marked indi-

cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,

there are areas in which the pumps are

unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is

alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check

with the service station operator. To meet sea-

sonal air quality standards, some areas require

the use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen-

ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed

on page 135 must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol: Fuels containing up to 10%

ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol may

also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gaso-

hol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15%

MTBE may be used.

06 Starting and driving

Fuel requirements

135

Octane rating

Minimum octane

G028920

Typical pump octane label

Volvo recommends premium for best perform-

ance, but using 87 octane1 or above will not

affect engine reliability.

Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated

horsepower, torque, and fuel economy per-

formance using premium 91 octane fuel.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as oper-

ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,

or driving for extended periods at higher alti-

tudes than normal, it may be advisable to

switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to

change gasoline brands to fully utilize your

engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos-

sible operation.

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel or

changing gasoline brands, it may be neces-

sary to fill the tank more than once before a

difference in engine operation is noticeable.

Fuel Formulations

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a

knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.

Besides damaging the exhaust emission con-

trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been

strongly linked to certain forms of cancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.

Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to

certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area

where you must fill your own gas tank, take

precautions. These may include:

•standing upwind away from the filler nozzle

while refueling

•refueling only at gas stations with vapor

recovery systems that fully seal the mouth

of the filler neck during refueling

•wearing neoprene gloves while handling a

fuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives

With the exception of gas line antifreeze during

winter months, do not add solvents, thicken-

ers, or other store-bought additives to your

vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.

Overuse may damage your engine, and some

of these additives contain organically volatile

chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself

to these chemicals.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,

and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust

gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes

inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger

compartment is ventilated, and immediately

return the vehicle to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for correction.

1AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

06 Starting and driving

Fuel requirements

136

WARNING

Driving with the tailgate open: Driving with

the tailgate open could lead to poisonous

exhaust gases entering the passenger com-

partment.

•If the tailgate must be kept open for any

reason, proceed as follows:

•Close the windows

•Set the ventilation system control to air

flow to floor, windshield and side win-

dows and blower control to its highest

setting.

Weight distribution affects handling

At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a

tendency to understeer, which means that the

steering wheel has to be turned more than

might seem appropriate for the curvature of a

bend.

This ensures good stability and reduces the

risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that these

properties can alter with the vehicle load.

The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less

the tendency to understeer.

Handling, roadholding

Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure

all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check

that the tires are inflated to the recommended

pressure according to the vehicle load. See

"Tire pressure" section.

Loads should be distributed so that capacity

weight or maximum permissible axle loads are

not exceeded.

Conserving electrical current

Keep the following in mind to help minimize

battery drain:

•When the engine is not running, avoid turn-

ing the ignition key to position II (see

page 141). Many electrical systems (the

audio system, the optional infotainment/

navigation systems, power windows, etc)

will function with the ignition key in position

I. This position reduces drain on the bat-

tery.

•Please keep in mind that using systems,

accessories, etc that consume a great deal

of current when the engine is not running

could result in the battery being completely

drained. Driving or having the engine run-

ning for approximately 15 minutes will help

keep the battery charged.

NOTE

A warning message will be displayed in the

text window in the instrument panel when

the battery charge is low.

06 Starting and driving

Refueling

137

Fuel filler door

G027073

The fuel filler cap can be placed on the hook on

the fuel filler door while refueling

Press the button on the light switch panel (see

the illustration on page 67) when the vehicle is

at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door.

Please note that the fuel filler door will remain

unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for-

ward. An audible click will be heard when the

fuel filler door relocks.

If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is

being refueled, this feature enables you to lock

the doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel filler

door unlocked.

You can also keep the vehicle locked if you

remain inside it during refueling. The central

locking button does not lock the fuel filler door.

Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and

is completely closed after refueling.

Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot

weather.

NOTE

During a transitional period, a small number

of service stations may still have fuel noz-

zles that are not compatible with the fuel

filler neck on vehicles equipped with the

evaporative control system.

Refueling

The fuel tank is designed to accommodate

possible expansion of the fuel in hot weather.

See page 282 for fuel tank volume. Be aware

that the "usable" tank capacity will be some-

what less than the specified maximum. When

the fuel level is low, such factors as ambient

temperature, the fuel's "Reid vapor pressure"

characteristics, and terrain can affect the fuel

pump's ability to supply the engine with an

adequate supply of fuel. Therefore, it is advis-

able to refuel as soon as possible when the

needle nears the red zone, or when the fuel

warning light comes on.

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switched on

while refueling your vehicle. If the phone

rings, this may cause a spark that could

ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and

injury.

06 Starting and driving

Refueling

138

CAUTION

•Do not refuel with the engine running1.

Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the

ignition is on, an incorrect reading could

occur in the fuel gauge.

•After refueling, close the fuel filler cap

by turning it clockwise until it clicks into

place1.

•Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not

press the handle on the filler nozzle

more than one extra time. Too much fuel

in the tank in hot weather conditions can

cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling

could also cause damage to the emis-

sion control systems.

•Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.

In addition to causing damage to the

environment, gasolines containing

alcohol can cause damage to painted

surfaces, which may not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty.

•Do not use gasolines containing meth-

anol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol).

This practice can result in vehicle per-

formance deterioration and can dam-

age critical parts in the fuel system.

Such damage may not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty.

1If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's

performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle

139

Starting the engine

WARNING

Before starting, check that the seat, steering

wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly.

Make sure the brake pedal can be

depressed completely. Adjust the seat if

necessary, see page 104.

1. Fasten the seat belt.

2. Apply the parking brake (hand brake) if not

already set. The gear selector is locked in

the P position (SHIFTLOCK).

3. Without touching the accelerator pedal,

turn the ignition key1 to the starting posi-

tion. Allow the starter to operate for up to

10 seconds. Release the key as soon as

the engine starts2. If the engine fails to

start, repeat this step.

NOTE

•If the key blade section of the remote is

not fully folded out when starting the

vehicle, the immobilizer function may

make it impossible to start the engine.

•After a cold start, idle speed may be

noticeably higher than normal for a

short period. This is done to help bring

components in the emission control

system to their normal operating tem-

perature as quickly as possible, which

enables them to control emissions and

help reduce the vehicle's impact on the

environment.

•To release the gear selector from the P

(Park) position, the engine must be run-

ning (or the ignition key must be in posi-

tion II) and the brake pedal must be

depressed.

•Select the desired gear. The gear

engages after a very slight delay which

is especially noticeable when selecting

NOTE

Your vehicle is equipped with a KEYLOCK

system. When the engine is switched off,

the gear selector must be in the P position

before the key can be removed from the

ignition switch.

When starting in cold weather, the trans-

mission may shift up at slightly higher

engine speeds than normal until the auto-

matic transmission fluid reaches normal

operating temperature.

NOTE

Do not race a cold engine immediately after

starting. Oil flow may not reach some lubri-

cation points fast enough to prevent engine

damage.

WARNING

An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause

the accelerator pedal to catch. Check that

the movement of the accelerator pedal is

not impeded. No more than one protective

floor covering may be used at one time.

1If two of the keys to your vehicle are close together, e.g. on the same key ring when you try to start the vehicle, this could cause interference in the immobilizer system and result in the vehicle not

starting. If this should occur, remove one of the keys from the key ring before trying to start the vehicle again.

2On vehicles equipped with the autostart feature, release the key immediately. See also page 141.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle

140

WARNING

Always place the gear selector in Park and

apply the parking brake before leaving the

vehicle. Never leave the vehicle unattended

with the engine running.

•Always open garage doors fully before

starting the engine inside a garage to

ensure adequate ventilation. The

exhaust gases contain carbon monox-

ide, which is invisible and odorless but

very poisonous.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission

•The engine should be idling when you

move the gear selector. Never acceler-

ate until after you feel the transmission

engage! Accelerating immediately after

selecting a gear will cause harsh

engagement and premature transmis-

sion wear.

•Selecting P or N when idling at a stand-

still for prolonged periods of time will

help prevent overheating of the auto-

matic transmission fluid.

06 Starting and driving

Ignition switch and steering wheel lock

141

Ignition switch and steering wheel lock

0 – Locked position:

Remove the key to lock

the steering wheelA.

I – Intermediate posi-

tionB – "radio position":

Certain accessories,

radio, etc. on, daytime

running lights off.

II – Drive position: The

key position when driv-

ing. The vehicle's entire

electrical system is con-

nected.

III – Start position:

Release the key when the

engine starts. The key

returns automatically to

the Drive position.

A chime will sound if the key is left in the

ignition and the driver's door is opened.

AThe gear selector must be in the P (Park) position (automatic

transmission).

BPlease be aware that leaving the key in this position will

increase battery drain.

Autostart

This function makes it possible to start the

vehicle without holding the key in the start

position (position III) until the engine starts.

Turn the key to position III and release it. The

starter motor will then operate automatically

(for up to ten seconds) until the engine starts.

Steering wheel lock

The steering wheel lock might be under tension

when the vehicle is parked.

Turn the steering wheel slightly to free the igni-

tion key.

In order to help reduce vehicle theft, make sure

the steering wheel lock is engaged before leav-

ing the vehicle.

WARNING

Never switch off the ignition (turn the ignition

key to position 0) or remove the key from the

ignition switch while the vehicle is in motion.

This could cause the steering wheel to lock,

which would make the vehicle impossible to

steer.

06 Starting and driving

Economical driving

142

Economical driving conserves natural

resources

Better driving economy may be obtained by

thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops

and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to

immediate traffic conditions. Observe the fol-

lowing rules:

•Bring the engine to normal operating tem-

perature as soon as possible by driving

with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for

the first few minutes of operation. A cold

engine uses more fuel and is subject to

increased wear.

•Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle

for driving short distances. This does not

allow the engine to reach normal operating

temperature.

•Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration

and hard braking.

•Use the transmission's D (Drive) position

as often as possible and avoid using "kick-

down" to help improve fuel economy.

•Do not exceed posted speed limits.

•Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra

load) in the vehicle.

•Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire

pressure regularly (when tires are cold).

•Remove snow tires when threat of snow or

ice has ended.

•Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,

increase air resistance and also fuel con-

sumption.

•At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-

tion will be lower with the air conditioning

on and the windows closed than with the

air conditioning off and the windows open.

•Using the onboard trip computer's fuel

consumption modes can help you learn

how to drive more economically.

Other factors that decrease gas mileage

are:

•Dirty air cleaner

•Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter

•Dragging brakes

•Incorrect front end alignment.

Some of the above mentioned items and others

are checked at the standard Maintenance

Service intervals.

CAUTION

Drive slowly and carefully if going through

standing water (i.e. flooded roadways, etc.).

Damage to the engine could result if excess

water is drawn in through the air intake sys-

tem. Never drive the vehicle in water deeper

than 18 inches (48 cm).

06 Starting and driving

Difficult driving conditions

143

Driving on rough/unpaved surfaces

The Volvo XC90 is designed primarily for on-

road driving, and it has excellent handling cha-

racteristics on very rough or unpaved roads.

When driving on poorly maintained or unpaved

roads, please keep the following in mind:

•Reduce speed on rough surfaces to mini-

mize possible damage to the vehicle's

underbody.

•When driving on soft surfaces such as dry

sand or snow, try to avoid stopping if at all

possible.

WARNING

Avoid driving diagonally across steep

inclines as this could increase the risk of a

roll-over. Try to drive straight up or down the

slope.

•If the road is very steep, avoid turning

the vehicle around to help avoid the risk

of rolling over. Back the vehicle up or

down the incline instead.

NOTE

Avoid driving on steep inclines if the fuel

tank is nearly empty. If the flow of fuel to the

engine is interrupted due to the vehicle's

angle of inclination, this could result in dam-

age to the three-way catalytic converter. We

recommend keeping the fuel tank at least

half full when driving on steep inclines.

Driving through water

The vehicle can be driven through water up to

a depth of approximately 16 inches (40 cm), at

a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).

Take particular care when driving through flow-

ing water.

Clean the electrical connections for trailer wir-

ing after driving in mud or water.

When driving through water, maintain low

speed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING

After driving through water, press lightly on

the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes

are functioning normally. Water or mud can

make the brake linings slippery, resulting in

delayed braking effect.

CAUTION

•Engine damage will occur if water is

drawn into the air cleaner.

•If the vehicle is driven through water

deeper than 18 in (48 cm), water may

enter the differential and the transmis-

sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating

capacity and may shorten the service

life of these components.

•Do not allow the vehicle to stand in

water up to the door sills longer than

absolutely necessary. This could result

in electrical malfunctions.

•If the engine has been stopped while the

car is in water, do not attempt to restart

the engine. Have the car towed out of

the water.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic transmission

144

G026990

P (Park)

Use this position when starting the engine or

parking the vehicle.

Never use P while the vehicle is in motion.

The parking brake should also be set whenever

the vehicle is parked.

The gear selector is mechanically locked in

the P position (SHIFTLOCK). To release the

gear selector from this position, the engine

must be running (or the ignition key must be in

position II) and the brake pedal must be

depressed.

N (Neutral)

Neutral – no gear engaged. Use the parking

brake.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle unattended when

the engine is running. If, by mistake, the gear

selector is moved from P, the vehicle may

start moving.

R (Reverse)

Never engage R while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

D is the normal driving position and should be

used as often as possible to help improve fuel

economy. The vehicle should not be moving

when shifting from R to the D position.

NOTE

The transmission has 6 forward speeds.

Automatic transmission – shift gate

positions

G020237

Shift gate positions

Depress the button on the front of the gear

selector knob to move between the R, N, D,

and P positions.

Kickdown

Automatic shift to a lower gear (kickdown) is

achieved by depressing the accelerator pedal

fully and briskly. An upshift will occur when

approaching the top speed for a particular gear

or by releasing the accelerator pedal slightly.

Kickdown can be used for maximum acceler-

ation or when passing at highway speeds.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic transmission

145

NOTE

The gear selector must be in the D (Drive)

position for kickdown to function.

Manual shifting – Geartronic

You can move the gear selector freely between

the MAN (Manual) and D (Drive) positions to

select forward gears while driving. Gears 3, 4,

5, and 6 have a "lock-up" function which

reduces engine speed and helps save fuel.

NOTE

Reverse, Neutral, and Park cannot be

selected in Geartronic mode.

•A "lock-up" feature1 reduces engine speed

and help saves fuel.

The currently selected gear will be displayed in

the instrument panel (see page 58).

•To access the MAN shifting position from

D, move the gear selector to the left to

MAN.

•To return to the D positions from MAN,

move the gear selector to the right.

While driving

If you select the MAN position while driving, the

gear that was being used in the D position will

also initially be selected in MAN position.

•Move the gear selector forward

(toward "+") to shift to a higher gear or

rearward (toward "– ") to shift to a lower

gear.

•If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the

transmission will downshift one gear and

will utilize the braking power of the engine.

If the current speed is too high for using a

lower gear, the downshift will not occur

until the speed has decreased enough to

allow the lower gear to be used.

•If you slow down to a very low speed, the

transmission will automatically shift down.

•When starting in the MAN position, 3rd

gear is the highest gear that may be

selected.

W – Winter/Wet driving mode –

enhanced vehicle traction

G030859

Press the W button at the base of the gear

selector to engage/disengage this driving

mode (see illustration). The W symbol will

appear in the display (see page 58) when the

function is activated.

This mode may be selected for starting/moving

off on slippery roads. The vehicle starts off in

3rd gear to help maintain traction. First and

second gears will only be used during kick-

down.

1Six-speed transmission: gears 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic transmission

146

NOTE

Mode W can be chosen regardless of the

postion of the gear selector but will only

function when the gear selector is in the D

(drive) position.

06 Starting and driving

Jump starting

147

G030860

Follow these instructions to jump start your

vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another

vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle.

Although your vehicle's battery is located

under the floor of the cargo area, jumper cables

should be connected in the engine compart-

ment, to the points shown in the illustrations.

If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in

another vehicle, check that the vehicles are not

touching to prevent premature completion of a

circuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc-

tions provided for the other vehicle.

To jump start your vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. First connect the auxiliary battery positive

(+) terminal (1) to the positive (+) terminal in

your vehicle's engine compartment (2),

located under a small black plastic cover

attached to the fuse box cover, marked

with a "+" sign. Remove the cover on the

main fuse box if necessary to access this

terminal. Then connect the auxiliary bat-

tery's negative (–) terminal (3) to the ground

point in your vehicle's engine compartment

(4).

3. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,

then start the engine in the vehicle with

dead battery.

4. After the engine has started, first remove

the negative (–) terminal jumper cable.

Then remove the positive (+) terminal

jumper cable.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the state of California

to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

WARNING

•Do not connect the jumper cable to any

part of the fuel system or to any moving

parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.

•Never expose the battery to open flame

or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which

is flammable and explosive.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-

tact occurs, flush the affected area

immediately with water. Obtain medical

help immediately if eyes are affected.

•Failure to follow the instructions for

jump starting can lead to personal

injury.

06 Starting and driving

All Wheel Drive*

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

All Wheel Drive (AWD) – general

information

Your Volvo can be equipped with an electron-

ically controlled All Wheel Drive system*, which

means that power is distributed automatically

between the front and rear wheels. Under nor-

mal driving conditions, most of the engine's

power is directed to the front wheels. However,

if there is any tendency for the front wheels to

spin, an electronically controlled coupling dis-

tributes power to the wheels that have the best

traction.

Tire dimensions

Volvo recommends that you always drive on

tires of the same brand, size, construction

(radial), tread pattern, load-, speed-, traction-,

temperature-, and treadwear rating. Never

drive on mixed tires, except for brief periods

when the temporary spare tire is in use.

Always use properly inflated tires of correct

dimensions. Tire size and inflation pressures

are shown on the tire inflation pressure plac-

ards, located on the driver's side B-pillar (the

structural member at the side of the vehicle, at

the rear of the driver's door opening), or on the

inside of the fuel filler door on Canadian mod-

els.

Temporary Spare

The temporary spare tire is for temporary, low-

speed, short-distance use only. Replace it with

a full-sized tire as soon as possible. Do not

drive on the temporary spare at speeds above

50 m.p.h. (80 km/h).

NOTE

Never install snow chains on a temporary

spare.

06 Starting and driving

Brake system

149

BRAKE Brake circuit malfunction

The brake system is a hydraulic system con-

sisting of two master cylinders and two sepa-

rate brake circuits. If a problem should occur in

one of these circuits, it is still possible to stop

the vehicle with the other brake circuit.

If the brake pedal must be depressed farther

than normal and requires greater foot pressure,

the stopping distance will be longer.

A warning light in the instrument panel will light

up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.

If this light comes on while driving or braking,

stop immediately and check the brake fluid

level in the reservoir.

NOTE

Press the brake pedal hard and maintain

pressure on the pedal – do not pump the

brakes.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the

reservoir or if a Brake failure – Service

urgent message is displayed in the text

window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician and have the brake system

inspected.

NOTE

When the vehicle is at a standstill and the

engine is idling, e.g. at a traffic light and the

brake pedal is depressed, the pedal may go

down slightly. This is a normal function of

the power-assisted brake system.

Power brakes function only when the

engine is running

The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure

which is only created when the engine is run-

ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the

engine switched off.

If the power brakes are not working, consider-

ably higher pressure will be required on the

brake pedal to compensate for the lack of

power assistance. This can happen for exam-

ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is

switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The

brake pedal feels harder than usual.

Water on brake discs and brake pads

affects braking

Driving in rain and slush or passing through an

automatic car wash can cause water to collect

on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a

delay in braking effect when the pedal is

depressed. To avoid such a delay when the

brakes are needed, depress the pedal occa-

sionally when driving through rain, slush etc.

This will remove the water from the brakes.

Check that brake application feels normal. This

should also be done after washing or starting

in very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system

The brakes will be subject to severe strain

when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or

when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually

slower, which means that the cooling of the

brakes is less efficient than when driving on

level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,

shift into a lower gear and let the engine help

with the braking. Do not forget that, if you are

towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to

a greater than normal load.

Anti-lock brakes (ABS)

If the ABS warning lamp lights up there is a

malfunction in the ABS system (the standard

braking system will however function) and the

vehicle should be driven cautiously to a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician for

inspection. The Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) helps to improve vehicle control (stop-

ping and steering) during severe braking con-

ditions by limiting brake lockup. When the sys-

tem "senses" impending lockup, braking pres-

sure is automatically modulated in order to help

prevent lockup, which could lead to a skid.

The system performs a self-diagnostic test

when the engine is started and when the

vehicle first reaches a speed of approxi-

06 Starting and driving

Brake system

150

mately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal will

pulsate several times and a sound may be

audible from the ABS control module. This is

normal.

To obtain optimal effect from the ABS system,

constant pressure should be kept on the brake

pedal. Do not pump the brake pedal.

The switching of the ABS modulator will be

audible and the brake pedal will pulsate during

braking. Please be aware that ABS does not

increase the absolute braking potential of the

vehicle. While control will be enhanced, ABS

will not shorten stopping distances on slippery

surfaces.

ABS with EBD (Electronic Brake Force

Distribution)

EBD is an integrated part of the ABS system.

EBD regulates the hydraulic pressure to the

rear brakes to help provide optimal braking

capacity. The brake pedal will pulsate during

braking, which is normal.

If the BRAKE and ABS warning lights come on

at the same time, this could indicate a fault in

the brake system.

1. Stop the vehicle in a suitable place and

switch off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

•If both warning lights go off, no further

action is required.

•If both lights are still on after the engine has

been restarted, switch off the engine again

and check the brake fluid level (see

page 218 for the location of the brake fluid

reservoir).

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the

reservoir or if a Brake failure – Service

urgent message is displayed in the text

window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician and have the brake system

inspected.

•If the brake fluid level is above the MIN

mark, drive carefully to a trained and quali-

fied Volvo service technician and have the

brake system inspected.

Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)

The EBA function is designed to provide full

brake effect immediately in the event of sud-

den, hard braking. The system is activated by

the speed with which you depress the brake

pedal.

NOTE

•When the EBA system is activated, the

brake pedal will go down and pressure

in the brake system immediately increa-

ses to the maximum level. You must

maintain full pressure on the brake

pedal in order to utilize the system com-

pletely. There will be no braking effect if

the pedal is released. EBA is automati-

cally deactivated when the brake pedal

is released.

•When the vehicle has been parked for

some time, the brake pedal may sink

more than usual when the engine is

started. This is normal and the pedal will

return to its usual position when it is

released.

06 Starting and driving

Parking brake

151

G026992

Parking brake pedal

Handle for releasing the parking brake

The parking brake pedal is located under the

dashboard, to the left of the brake pedal.

NOTE

The indicator light will light up even if the

parking brake has only been partiallyap-

plied.

When applying the parking brake

1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

2. Press down pedal (1) firmly to its full extent.

3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that

the vehicle is at a standstill.

4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake pedal

must be pushed down more firmly.

5. When parking a vehicle always put the gear

selector in P.

Parking on a hill

•If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front

wheels so that they point away from the

curb.

•If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the

front wheels so that they point toward the

curb.

Releasing the parking brake

1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

2. Pull handle (2).

NOTE

If you inadvertently pull the plastic cover, it

can be pressed back into place.

WARNING

Press down the parking brake pedal firmly

to its full extent.

06 Starting and driving

Stability system

152

Dynamic Stability Traction Control

(DSTC)

The stability system consists of a number of

functions designed help reduce wheel spin,

counteract skidding, and to generally help

improve directional stability.

NOTE

A pulsating sound will be audible when the

system is actively operating and is normal.

Traction control (TC)

This function is designed to help reduce wheel

spin by transferring power from a drive wheel

that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the

opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).

TC is most active at low speeds.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and

cannot be switched off.

Spin control (SC)

The spin control function is designed to help

prevent the drive wheels from spinning while

the vehicle is accelerating.

Under certain circumstances, such as when

driving with snow chains, or driving in deep

snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to

temporarily switch off this function for maxi-

mum tractive force.

Temporarily switching off Spin control

1. Turn the thumbwheel (1) on the left-side

steering wheel lever until the DSTC

menu is displayed.

2. Hold down the RESET button (2) to toggle

between DSTC SPIN CONTROL ON or

OFF.

NOTE

•The message DSTC SPIN CONTROL

OFF indicates that the stability sys-

tem's spin control function has tempo-

rarily been switched off.

•The stability control indicator light will

illuminate and remain on until spin con-

trol has been reactivated.

•The spin control function is automati-

cally enabled each time the engine is

started.

•DSTC ON indicates that all system

functions are active.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

This function helps maintain directional stabil-

ity, for example when cornering, by braking

one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows

a tendency to skid or slide laterally.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and

cannot be switched off.

WARNING

The car's handling and stability characteris-

tics will be altered if the DSTC system func-

tions have been disabled.

06 Starting and driving

Stability system

153

DSTC-related messages in the text

window

•TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY

OFF – The system has been temporarily

switched off due to high brake temperature

and will automatically switch on again

when the brakes have cooled.

•"ANTI SKID SERVICE REQUIRED" – the

system has been automatically disen-

gaged due to a fault. A trained and qualified

Volvo service technician should check the

system.

Symbols in the instrument panel

The Stability Control indicator light

This light indicates different condi-

tions, depending on how it illumi-

nates.

The Stability Control indicator light

illuminates for approximately 2 seconds

This indicates that the system is performing a

self-diagnostic test when the ignition is

switched on.

The Stability Control indicator light

flashes

This indicates that the stability system is

actively functioning to help counteract wheel

spin and/or a skid.

The Stability Control indicator light

glows steadily

ANTI SKID SERVICE REQUIRED will be dis-

played in the text window at the same time.

A fault is indicated in the stability system.

•Stop the vehicle in a safe place and switch

off the engine.

•Restart the engine.

•If the indicator light goes out, the fault was

temporary and no further action is

required.

•If the indicator light remains on, drive to an

authorized Volvo workshop as soon as

possible to have the system checked.

The Stability Control indicator light

glows steadily

If DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF is displayed in

the text window at the same time, this is a

reminder that spin control has been disabled

by the driver.

The warning symbol

The warning symbol glows

steadily yellow

The system has been temporarily switched off

due to high brake temperature. "TRACTION

CONTROL TEMPORARILY OFF" will be dis-

played. The system will automatically switch

on again when the brakes have cooled.

WARNING

The stability system is intended to help

improve driving safety. It supplements, but

can never replace, the driver's judgement

and responsibility when operating the vehi-

cle. Speed and driving style should always

be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

06 Starting and driving

Front/rear park assist*

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front/rear park assist

The park assist system is designed to assist

you when driving into parking spaces, garages,

etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors located

in one or both bumpers to measure the dis-

tance to a vehicle, object, or a person who may

be close to the front or rear of your vehicle.

Park assist is available in two versions:

•Rear bumper only

•Front and rear bumpers

WARNING

Park Assist is an information system, NOT a

safety system. This system is designed to

be a supplementary aid when parking the

vehicle. It is not, however, intended to

replace the driver's attention and judge-

ment.

Function

The system is activated automatically when the

vehicle is started. The indicator light in the but-

ton in the center console illuminates.

•The front park assist system is active from

the time the engine is started until the vehi-

cle exceeds a speed of approximately

10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the

vehicle is backing up.

•Rear park assist is active when the engine

is running and reverse gear has been

selected.

Rear park assist

The distance monitored behind the vehicle is

approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The signal comes

from the rear speakers.

The system must be deactivated when towing

a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted

carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park

assist system's sensors.

NOTE

Rear park assist is deactivated automati-

cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine

trailer wiring is used.

Front park assist

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle

is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig-

nal comes from the audio system's front

speakers.

•It may not be possible to combine auxiliary

headlights and front park assist since

these lights could trigger the system's sen-

sors.

Activating/deactivating park assist

The system is activated automatically when the

vehicle is started.

•Press the Park assist button on the center

console (see page 64) to temporarily deac-

tivate the system(s). The indicator light in

the button will go out when the system has

been deactivated.

•Park assist will be automatically reactiva-

ted the next time the engine is started, or if

the button is pressed (the indicator light in

the button will illuminate).

06 Starting and driving

Front/rear park assist*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155

NOTE

•Front park assist is disengaged auto-

matically when the parking brake is

applied.

•If the vehicle is equipped with front and

rear park assist, both systems will be

deactivated by pressing the button.

Audible signals from the park assist

system

The Park Assist system uses an intermittent

tone that pulses faster as you come close to an

object, and becomes constant when you are

within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object

in front of or behind the vehicle. If the volume

of another source from the audio system is

high, this will be automatically lowered.

If there are objects within this distance both

behind and in front of the vehicle, the signal

alternates between front and rear speakers.

Faults in the system

If the yellow warning symbol illu-

minates and PARK ASSIST

SERVICE REQUIRED is shown

on the information display, this

indicates that the system is not

functioning properly and has been disengaged.

Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the park assist

system may give unexpected warning sig-

nals that can be caused by external sound

sources that use the same ultrasound fre-

quencies as the system. This may include

such things as the horns of other vehicles,

wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,

motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does

not indicate a fault in the system.

Cleaning the sensors

G026946

Park assist sensors

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to

ensure that they work properly. Clean them

with water and a suitable car washing deter-

gent.

Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause

incorrect warning signals.

NOTE

If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,

snow, or ice, this could result in false warn-

ing signals from the park assist system.

06 Starting and driving

Towing

156

G027042

Positions for attaching towing eyelets

Emergency towing

The towing eyelet is located in the tool bag,

under the floor of the cargo area. This eyelet

must be screwed into the positions provided

on the right sides of either the front or rear

bumper (see illustrations).

To attach the towing eyelet:

1. Use a coin to pry open the lower edge of

the cover (A)

2. Screw the towing eyelet (C) in place (B),

first by hand and then using the tire iron

until it is securely in place.

After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet

should be removed and returned to the tool

bag. Press the cover back into position.

WARNING

Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the

vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.

Precautions when the vehicle is in tow

•The steering wheel must be unlocked. Turn

the ignition key to position I or II.

•The gear selector must be in position N.

•Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not

exceed the maximum allowable towing

speed.

•Maximum distance with front wheels on

ground: 50 miles (80 km).

•While the vehicle is being towed, try to

keep the tow rope taut at all times.

•The vehicle should only be towed in the

forward direction.

06 Starting and driving

Towing

157

CAUTION

Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with the

front wheels off the ground should not be

towed at speeds above 50 mph (70 km/h) or

for distances longer than 30 miles (50 km).

CAUTION

•Please check with state and local

authorities before attempting this type

of towing, as vehicles being towed are

subject to regulations regarding maxi-

mum towing speed, length and type of

towing device, lighting, etc.

•If the vehicle's battery is dead, do not

attempt to start the vehicle by pushing

or pulling it as this will damage the

three-way catalytic converter(s). The

engine must be jump started using an

auxiliary battery (see page 147).

•If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed

truck, the towing eyelets must not be

used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat

bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat

bed. Consult the tow truck operator.

WARNING

•Remember that the power brakes and

power steering will not function when

engine is not running. The braking and

steering systems will function but con-

siderably higher pressure will be

required on the brake pedal and greater

steering effort must be exerted.

•The towing eyelets must not be used for

pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for

any similar purpose involving severe

strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to

pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow

truck.

G030862

Towing vehicles with front wheel drive/

All Wheel Drive

Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip-

ment.

If wheel lift equipment must be used, please

use extreme caution to help avoid damage to

the vehicle. In this case, the vehicle should

be towed with the rear wheels on the ground

if at all possible.

If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle

with the front wheels on the ground, please

refer to the towing information on the previous

page.

CAUTION

•Sling-type equipment applied at the

front will damage radiator and air con-

ditioning lines.

•It is equally important not to use sling-

type equipment at the rear or apply lift-

ing equipment inside the rear wheels;

serious damage to the rear axle may

result.

•If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed

truck, the towing eyelets must not be

used to secure the vehicle on the flat

bed. Consult the tow truck operator.

06 Starting and driving

Towing a trailer

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The maximum weights recommended by Volvo

for trailers with brakes are shown in the table

below.

Recommended hitch tongue load: not more

than 10% of the trailer's weight. The trailer

load should be positioned so that it does not

shift and the tongue load should be 10% of the

trailer's weight. However, the tongue load

should not exceed the maximum permissible

weights indicated in the table below.

No. of occu-

pants

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Seating posi-

tion

Front seat Front seat 2nd row of

seats

2nd row of

seats

2nd row of

seats

3rd row of

seats*

3rd row of

seats*

All Wheel Drive 5,000 lbs

(2250 kg)

5,000 lbs

(2250 kg)

4,500 lbs

(2050 kg)

3,700 lbs

(1700 kg)

2,900 lbs

(1350 kg)

1,800 lbs

(800 kg)

Trailer towing

not recom-

mended

Max. trailer

hitch tongue

load

500 lbs

(225 kg)

500 lbs

(225 kg)

450 lbs

(205 kg)

370 lbs

(170 kg)

290 lbs

(135 kg)

180 lbs

(80 kg)

–

Front Wheel

Drive

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

3,700 lbs

(1650 kg)

2,500 lbs

(1150 kg)

1,400 lbs

(650 kg)

Max. trailer

hitch tongue

load

400 lbs

(180 kg)

400 lbs

(180 kg)

400 lbs

(180 kg)

400 lbs

(180 kg)

370 lbs

(165 kg)

250 lbs

(115 kg)

140 lba

(65 kg)

06 Starting and driving

Towing a trailer

159

Points to keep in mind when towing a

trailer

•When towing trailers without brakes, the

maximum permissible trailer weight is

1,700 lbs (750 kg).

•If necessary, redistribute the weight of any

cargo in the trailer to avoid excessive

weight on the trailer hitch.

•The maximum trailer weight listed in the

table for All Wheel Drive models, 5,000 lbs

(2250 kg) is only applicable when there are

not more than two occupants in the vehi-

cle, in the front seats, with a combined

weight of 300 lbs (135 kg), with no other

cargo in the vehicle.

•The maximum weight listed for Front

Wheel Drive models, 4,000 lbs (1800 kg) is

only applicable when there are not more

than four occupants in the vehicle, in the

front seats and second row of seats, with

a combined weight of 600 lbs (270 kg), with

no other cargo in the vehicle.

•Vehicles used for towing a trailer on a reg-

ular basis, or for long-distance highway

towing should be equipped with an auto-

matic transmission oil cooler and Volvo's

automatic self-leveling system for the rear

suspension. Consult your Volvo retailer.

•Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer

hitches that are specially designed for the

vehicle.

•All Volvo models are equipped with

energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump-

ers. Trailer hitch installation should not

interfere with the proper operation of this

bumper system.

•Increase tire pressure to recommended full

inflation pressure. See chapter "Wheels

and tires."

•When your vehicle is new, avoid towing

heavy trailers during the first 620 miles

(1,000 km).

•Engine and transmission are subject to

increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant

temperature should be closely watched

when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain.

Use a lower gear and turn off the air con-

ditioner if the temperature gauge needle

enters the red range.

•If the automatic transmission begins to

overheat, a message will be displayed in

the text window.

•Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-

ity, and economy.

•It is necessary to balance trailer brakes

with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a

safe stop (check and observe state/local

regulations).

•Do not connect the trailer's brake system

directly to the vehicle's brake system.

•Remove the ball and drawbar assembly

when the hitch is not being used.

•Volvo recommends the use of synthetic

engine oil when towing a trailer over long

distances or in mountainous areas.

NOTE

•When parking the vehicle with a trailer

on a hill, apply the parking brake before

putting the gear selector in P. When

starting on a hill, put the gear selector in

D before releasing the parking brake.

Always follow the trailer manufacturer's

recommendations for wheel chocking.

•If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift

positions while towing a trailer, make

sure the gear you select does not put

too much strain on the engine (using too

high a gear).

06 Starting and driving

Towing a trailer

160

WARNING

•Bumper-attached trailer hitches must

not be used on Volvos, nor should

safety chains be attached to the

bumper.

•Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle

rear axle must not be used.

•Never connect a trailer's hydraulic

brake system directly to the vehicle

brake system, nor a trailer's lighting

system directly to the vehicle lighting

system. Consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for correct

installation.

•When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety

wire must be correctly fastened to the

hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch

on the vehicle. The safety wire should

never be fastened to or wound around

the drawbar ball.

Smoother starts with a trailer

Models equipped with the V8-engine and the

6-speed automatic transmission have a built-

in function that reduces acceleration slightly in

first gear when the vehicle is towing a trailer.

This is done to help avoid wheel spin and to

make starting off smoother.

•This function is activated when the trailer's

electrical connector is plugged into the

electrical socket mounted near the trailer

hitch.

•The function is automatically deactivated

when the trailer's wiring is disconnected

from the socket. The vehicle will then

accelerate normally.

NOTE

Since this function is activated when a con-

nector is plugged into the electrical socket

near the trailer hitch, it will be activated by

any electrical equipment (e.g. bicycle racks

with lighting, etc) that is plugged in, and will

remain active until the equipment is unplug-

ged from the socket.

Leveling

If your vehicle is equipped with automatic lev-

eling, the rear suspension always retains the

correct ride height regardless of the load.

•The system adjusts the rear suspension to

the correct level after the vehicle has been

driven a short distance.

•When the vehicle is stationary, the rear

suspension lowers, which is normal.

06 Starting and driving

Detachable trailer hitch

161

Overview

G010496

Ball holder

Locking bolt

Cotter pin

Hitch assembly

Safety wire attachment

Installing the ball holder

1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from

the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt

out of the hitch assembly.

2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem-

bly.

3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one

in the hitch assembly.

4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch

assembly/ball holder.

5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end

of the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt

and slide the locking bolt out of the ball

holder/hitch assembly.

2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem-

bly.

A cover for the hitch assembly can be pur-

chased from your Volvo retailer.

06 Starting and driving

Load carriers (accessory)

162

Positioning load carriers

If wing-shaped load carriers are used, make

sure that they are installed on the roof rails with

the rounded edge forward. Load carriers of this

type are identical and can be placed anywhere

along the roof rails.

When not in use, we recommend that the front

load carrier be placed approximately 2 inches

(5 cm) in front of the center roof rail anchorage

point and the rear load carrier approximately

1.5 inches (3.5 cm) in front of the rear rail

anchorage. This will help to reduce wind noise.

Installing load carriers

Make sure that the load carriers are pressed

firmly out against the roof rail and securely

tightened place. Check regularly that any load

carriers are securely in place.

WARNING

Loads carried on the vehicle's roof should

not exceed 220 lbs (100 kg), including the

weight of the load carriers and any other

load carrying equipment (ski boxes, bicycle

racks, etc.). Excessive loads on the roof can

adversely affect the handling and roadhold-

ing characteristics of the vehicle.

06 Starting and driving

Cold weather precautions

163

If you wish to check your vehicle before the

approach of cold weather, the following advice

is worth noting:

•Make sure that the engine coolant contains

50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture

will reduce freeze protection. This gives

protection against freezing down to –31 °F

(–35 °C). See section "Coolant".

•The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not

approved by Volvo. Different types of

antifreeze must not be mixed.

•Volvo recommends using only genuine

Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.

Your Volvo retailer stocks plenty of Volvo

engine coolant to protect your vehicle dur-

ing cold weather.

•Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this

prevents the formation of condensation in

the tank. In addition, in extremely cold

weather conditions it is worthwhile to add

fuel line de-icer before refueling.

•The viscosity of the engine oil is important.

Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves

cold-weather starting as well as decreas-

ing fuel consumption while the engine is

warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, par-

ticularly the synthetic type1, is recom-

mended. Be sure to use good quality oil but

do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving

or in warm weather. See section "Engine

oil" for more information.

•The load placed on the battery is greater

during the winter since the windshield wip-

ers, lighting, etc. are used more often.

Moreover, the capacity of the battery

decreases as the temperature drops. In

very cold weather, a poorly charged bat-

tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there-

fore advisable to check the state of charge

more frequently and spray an antirust oil on

the battery posts.

•Volvo recommends the use of snow tires

on all four wheels for winter driving – see

section "Wheels and tires."

•To prevent the washer fluid reservoir

from freezing, add washer solvents con-

taining antifreeze (see page 217 for the

location of the washer fluid reservoir). This

is important since dirt is often splashed on

the windshield during winter driving,

requiring the frequent use of the washers

and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent should

be diluted as follows:

•Down to 14 ° F (–10 ° C): 1 part washer

solvent and 4 parts water

•Down to 5 ° F (–15 ° C): 1 part washer sol-

vent and 3 parts water

•Down to 0 ° F (–18 ° C):1 part washer sol-

vent and 2 parts water

•Down to –18 ° F (–28 ° C): 1 part washer

solvent and 1 part water

•Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.

NOTE

Avoid the use of de-icing sprays as they can

cause damage to the locks.

W – Winter/Wet driving mode – enhanced

vehicle traction

•Mode W will only function if the gear selec-

tor is in the (D)rive position.

•Press the button at the base of the gear

selector to engage/disengage this driving

mode.

•An LED in the button will light up to indicate

that W is engaged and this will also be dis-

played in the instrument panel (see

page 58).

•This mode may be selected for starting/

moving off on slippery roads.

1Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance service intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer.

06 Starting and driving

Before a long distance trip

164

It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle

checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician before driving long distances.

Your retailer or service technician will also be

able to supply you with bulbs, fuses, spark

plugs and wiper blades for your use in the event

that problems occur.

As a minimum, the following items should be

checked before any long trip:

•Check that engine runs smoothly and that

fuel consumption is normal.

•Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.

•Check transmission oil level1.

•Check condition of drive belts.

•Check state of the battery's charge.

•Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as

well), and replace those that are worn.

Check tire pressures.

•The brakes, front wheel alignment, and

steering gear should be checked by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian only.

•Check all lights, including high beams.

•Reflective warning triangles are legally

required in some states/provinces.

•Have a word with your Volvo retailer if you

intend to drive in countries where it may be

difficult to obtain the correct fuel.

•Consider your destination. If you will be

driving through an area where snow or ice

are likely to occur, consider snow tires.

1To prevent injury from contact with hot surfaces, do not inspect your vehicle’s transmission fluid yourself. Have your vehicle’s transmission fluid level inspected by a qualified Volvo service technician.

06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

G020295

BLIS camera

Indicator light

BLIS symbol

The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an

information system that indicates the presence

of another vehicle moving in the same direction

as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind

area."

The system is based on digital camera tech-

nology. The cameras (1) are located beneath

the side-view mirrors.

When one (or both) of the cameras have

detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to

approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of

your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.

(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see

the illustration, the indicator light in the door

panel (2) illuminates. The light will glow contin-

uously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the

blind area.

WARNING

•BLIS is an information system, NOT a

warning or safety system.

•BLIS does not eliminate the need for

you to visually confirm the conditions

around you, and the need for you to turn

your head and shoulders to make sure

that you can safely change lanes.

•As the driver, you have full responsibility

for changing lanes in a safe manner.

NOTE

The door panel indicator light illuminates on

the side of the vehicle where the system has

detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is

passed on both sides at the same time, both

lights will illuminate.

Areas monitored by BLIS

Distance A = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters)

Distance B = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters)

BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the

driver if a fault should occur with the system.

For example, if one or both of the system's

cameras are obscured, a message ( see the

table on page 167) will appear in the informa-

tion display in the instrument panel. If this

occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,

the system can be temporarily switched off (for

instructions, see page 167).

When does BLIS function

The system functions when your vehicle is

moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System*

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

When you pass another vehicle:

The system reacts when you pass another

vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)

faster than that vehicle.

When you are passed by another vehicle:

The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by

another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph

(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.

WARNING

•BLIS does not function in sharp curves.

•BLIS does not function when your vehi-

cle is backing up.

•If you are towing a wide trailer, this may

prevent the BLIS cameras from detect-

ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes.

How BLIS functions in daylight and

darkness

Daylight

BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi-

cles. The system is designed to help detect

motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,

motorcycles, etc.

Darkness

BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding

vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a

vehicle in the blind area must have its head-

lights on. This means, for example, that the

system will not detect a trailer without head-

lights that is being towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

•BLIS does not react to cyclists or

mopeds.

•BLIS does not react to vehicles that are

standing still.

•The BLIS cameras have the same limi-

tation as the human eye. In other words,

their "vision is impaired" by adverse

weather conditions such as heavy

snowfall, intense light directly into the

camera, dense fog, etc.

Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses

In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera

lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped

clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.

CAUTION

•Clean the lenses carefully to avoid

scratching.

•The lenses are electrically heated to

help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen-

tly brush away snow from the lenses.

Limitations

In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)

may illuminate even when there are no other

vehicles in the area monitored by the system.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa-

sionally even when there are no other vehi-

cles in the blind area, this does not indicate

a fault in the system.

In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.

service required will be displayed.

The following are several examples of situa-

tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may

illuminate even when there are no other vehi-

cles in the area monitored by the system.

Light reflected from a wet road surface

06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167

G018177

The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,

smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on

a highway

Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low

on the horizon

G026955

Switching BLIS on and off

BLIS is automatically activated when the igni-

tion is switched on. The indicator lights will

provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.

•The system can be switched off by press-

ing the BLIS button in the center console

(see the illustration). The indicator light in

the button goes out when the system is

switched off, and a text message is dis-

played.

•BLIS can be switched on again by pressing

the button. The indicator light in the button

will illuminate and a new text message will

be displayed. Press the READ button (see

page 62) to erase the message.

System status Text in the dis-

play

BLIND-SPOT

SYST SERVICE

REQUIRED

BLIS not functioning

properly. Contact an

authorized Volvo

service technician.

BLIND-SPOT

SYST R CAMERA

BLOCKED

The right side BLIS

camera is obscured.

Clean the lenses.

BLIND-SPOT

SYST L CAMERA

BLOCKED

The left side BLIS

camera is obscured.

Clean the lenses.

BLIND-SPOT

SYST CAMERAS

BLOCKED

BLIS camera

obscured. Clean the

lenses.

BLIND-SPOT INFO

SYSTEM OFF

BLIS system off

06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System*

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

System status Text in the dis-

play

BLIND-SPOT INFO

SYSTEM ON

BLIS system on

BLIND-SPOT

SYST FUNCTION

REDUCED

The BLIS cameras'

function has been

reduced due to

weak or impaired

data transfer

between the BLIS

system's cameras

and the vehicle's

electrical system.

The cameras will

reset themselves

when this data

transfer has

returned to normal.

The messages listed above can only be dis-

played if the ignition key is in position II (or if

the engine is running) and if BLIS is active (i.e.

if the system has not been turned off by press-

ing the BLIS button).

06 Starting and driving

169

170

General information............................................................................... 172

Tire inflation .......................................................................................... 175

Tire inflation pressure tables – U.S. models......................................... 177

Tire inflation pressure tables – Canadian models................................. 178

Tire designations................................................................................... 179

Glossary of tire terminology.................................................................. 181

Vehicle loading...................................................................................... 182

Uniform Tire Quality Grading................................................................ 183

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires................................................ 184

Temporary spare................................................................................... 185

Tire Sealing System ............................................................................. 186

Changing wheels................................................................................... 191

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............................................. 195

WHEELS AND TIRES

07 Wheels and tires

General information

172

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with tires according

to the vehicle's tire information placard on the

B-pillar (the structural member at the side of

the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door

opening).

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with an

Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com-

bination designed to provide maximum dry

pavement performance with consideration

for hydroplaning resistance. They may be

more susceptible to road hazard damage

and, depending on driving conditions, may

achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles

(30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped

with Volvo’s advanced AWD or DSTC sys-

tem, these tires are not designed for winter

driving, and should be replaced with winter

tires when weather conditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteris-

tics and offer good handling on dry and wet

surfaces. It should be noted however that the

tires have been developed to give these fea-

tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.

Most models are equipped with "all-season"

tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree

of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires

without the "all-season" rating. However, for

optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered

roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on

all four wheels.

When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires

are the same size designation, type (radial) and

preferably from the same manufacturer, on all

four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering

the car's roadholding and handling characte-

ristics.

New Tires

Remember that tires are perishable goods. As

of 2000, the manufacturing week and year

(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)

will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1510 means

that the tire illustrated was manufactured dur-

ing week 15 of 2010).

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they are

not being used. It is recommended that tires

generally be replaced after 6 years of normal

service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent

high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V)

exposure can accelerate the aging process.

The temporary spare1 should also be replaced

at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been

used.

A tire's age can be determined by the DOT

stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration

should be replaced immediately.

Improving tire economy

•Maintain correct tire pressure. For the tire

pressure tables, see pages 177 and 178.

•Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard

braking and tire screeching.

•Tire wear increases with speed.

•Correct front wheel alignment is very

important.

•Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy

and driving comfort.

•Tires must maintain the same direction of

rotation throughout their lifetime.

1Option or accessory on some models

07 Wheels and tires

General information

173

•When replacing tires, the tires with the

most tread should be mounted on the rear

wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer

during hard braking.

•Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the

tires and/or wheels permanently.

Summer and winter tires

G020325

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the

tire

•When switching between summer and

winter tires, mark the tires to indicate

where they were mounted on the car, e.g.,

LF = left front, RR = right rear

•Tires with tread designed to roll in only one

direction are marked with an arrow on the

sidewall.

•Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's

braking properties and ability to force

aside rain, snow and slush.

•The tires with the most tread should always

be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid-

ding).

•Contact a Volvo workshop if you are

unsure about the tread depth.

Storing wheels and tires

When storing complete wheels (tires mounted

on rims), they should be suspended off the

floor or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on

their sides or standing upright, but should not

be suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,

dry, dark place, and should never be stored

in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,

etc.

WARNING

•The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo

are specified to meet stringent stability

and handling requirements. Unap-

proved wheel/tire size combinations

can negatively affect your vehicle's sta-

bility and handling.

•Any damage caused by installation of

unapproved wheel/tire size combina-

tions will not be covered by your new

vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no

responsibility for death, injury, or

expenses that may result from such

installations.

Tire wear

Tire rotation

Tire wear is affected by a number of factors

such as tire inflation, ambient temperature,

driving style, etc. Your vehicle is driven mainly

by the front tires, which will wear faster.

If the tires are rotated, they should only be

moved from front to back or vice versa. They

should never be rotated left to right/right to left.

However, tire rotation, done at the recom-

mended intervals, is one way of helping to keep

tread wear as even as possible and will help

you get maximum mileage from your tires.

07 Wheels and tires

General information

174

Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first

time after approximately 3,000 miles

(5, 000 km) and thereafter at 6,000 mile

(10,000 km) intervals.

Tire rotation should only be performed if front/

rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height is

above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

NOTE

Tire rotation is not included in regularly

scheduled maintenance and is performed

only at customer request, at additional

charge.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidance

based on your particular driving circumstan-

ces.

Tread wear indicator

G020323

The tires have wear indicator strips running

across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI

are printed on the side of the tire. When

approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the

tread, these strips become visible and indicate

that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less

than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac-

tion.

When replacing worn tires, it is recommended

that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size

as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the

same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera-

tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

175

Inflation placard

G032513

Tire inflation placard

Check tire inflation pressure regularly.

Tables listing the recommended inflation pres-

sure for your vehicle can be found on pages

177 and 178. A tire inflation pressure placard

is also located on the driver's side B-pillar (the

structural member at the side of the vehicle, at

the rear of the driver's door opening). This plac-

ard indicates the designation of the factory-

mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as load

limits and inflation pressure.

NOTE

The placards shown indicate inflation pres-

sure for the tires installed on the vehicle at

the factory only.

•Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation

pressure, including the spare, at least once

a month and before long trips. You are

strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pres-

sure gauge, as automatic service station

gauges may be inaccurate.

•Use the recommended cold inflation pres-

sure for optimum tire performance and

wear.

•Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause

uneven treadwear patterns.

WARNING

•Under-inflation is the most common

cause of tire failure and may result in

severe tire cracking, tread separation,

or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of

vehicle control and increased risk of

injury.

•Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-

rying capacity of your vehicle.

When weather temperature changes occur, tire

inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree

temperature drop causes a corresponding

drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check

your tire pressures frequently and adjust them

to the proper pressure, which can be found on

the vehicle's tire information placard or certifi-

cation label.

Checking tire pressure

A certain amount of air seepage from the tires

occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates

with seasonal changes in temperature. Always

check tire pressure regularly.

Cold tires

Inflation pressure should be checked when the

tires are cold.

The tires are considered to be cold when

they have the same temperature as the sur-

rounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after the

vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile

(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If

you have to drive farther than this distance to

pump your tire(s), check and record the tire

pressure first and add the appropriate air pres-

sure when you get to the pump.

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,

never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires

are hot from driving and it is normal for pres-

sures to increase above recommended cold

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

176

pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended

cold inflation pressure could be significantly

under-inflated.

To check inflation pressure:

1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,

then firmly press the tire gauge onto the

valve.

2. Add air to reach the recommended air

pressure.

3. Replace the valve cap.

4. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ-

ing the spare.

5. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there

are no nails or other objects embedded

that could puncture the tire and cause an

air leak.

6. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are

no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular-

ities.

NOTE

•If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the center

of the valve. Then recheck the pressure

with your tire gauge.

•Some spare tires require higher inflation

pressure than the other tires. Consult

the tire inflation tables on pages 177

and 178 or see the inflation pressure

placard.

Speed ratings

The speed ratings in the table translate as fol-

low:

Speed ratings

M 81 mph (130 km/h)

Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

Load ratings

See page 179 for an explanation of the load

rating on the sidewall of the tire.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure tables – U.S. models

177

The following tire pressures are recommended

by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

tion placard (see page 175 for its location) for

information specific to the tires installed on

your vehicle at the factory.

Cold tire pressures up to five persons

Tire size Front, psi (kPa) Rear, psi (kPa)

235/65 R17

235/60 R18

255/50 R19

255/45 R20

36 (250) 36 (250)

Temporary spare tire 61 (420) 61 (420)

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure tables – Canadian models

178

The following tire pressures are recommended

by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

tion placard (see page 175 for its location) for

information specific to the tires installed on

your vehicle at the factory.

Cold tire pressures up to five persons

Tire size Cold tire pressures up to five persons psi (kPa) Optional pressure up to three persons psi (kPa)

Front Rear Front Rear

235/65 R17

235/60 R18

255/50 R19

255/45 R20

39 (270) 39 (270) 35 (240) 35 (240)

Temporary spare tire 61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420)

07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

179

7 9

G026442

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers

place standardized information on the sidewall

of all tires (see the illustration).

The following information is listed on the tire

sidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tire des-

ignation is an example only and that this

particular tire may not be available on your

vehicle.

215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)

from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The

larger the number, the wider the tire.

65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width

in percent.

R: Radial tire.

15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in

inches).

95: The tire's load index. In this example, a

load index of 95 equals a maximum load of

1521 lbs (690 kg).

H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum

speed at which the tire is designed to be

driven for extended periods of time, carry-

ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and

with correct inflation pressure. For exam-

ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph

(210 km/h).

NOTE

The tire's load index and speed rating may

not appear on the sidewall because they are

not required by law.

M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow; AT = All

Terrain; AS = All Season

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"

and indicates that the tire meets all federal

standards. The next two numbers or letters

are the plant code where it was manufac-

tured, the next two are the tire size code

and the last four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built. For exam-

ple, 1510 means that the tire was manu-

factured during week 15 of 2010. The num-

bers in between are marketing codes used

at the manufacturer's discretion. This infor-

mation helps a tire manufacturer identify a

tire for safety recall purposes.

Tire Ply Composition and Material

Used: Indicates the number of plies indi-

cates or the number of layers of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate the

ply materials in the tire and the sidewall,

which include steel, nylon, polyester, and

others.

Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum

load in pounds and kilograms that can be

carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire

information placard located on the B-Pillar

or the driver's door for the correct tire pres-

sure for your vehicle.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

180

Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature

grades: see page 183 for more informa-

tion.

Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air pres-

sure that should ever be put in the tire. This

limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

Tire suppliers may have additional markings,

notes or warnings such as standard load, radial

tubeless, etc.

07 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

181

•Tire information placard: A placard

showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire

sizes, recommended inflation pressure,

and the maximum weight the vehicle can

carry.

•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-

ber on the sidewall of each tire providing

information about the tire brand and man-

ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-

ufacturer.

•Inflation pressure: A measure of the

amount of air in a tire.

•Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met-

ric tires designed to carry a maximum load

at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].

Increasing the inflation pressure beyond

this pressure will not increase the tires load

carrying capability.

•Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric

tires designed to carry a heavier maximum

load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric

tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure

beyond this pressure will not increase the

tires load carrying capability.

•kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-

sure.

•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard

unit of air pressure.

•B-pillar: The structural member at the side

of the vehicle behind the front door.

•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next

to the rim.

•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the

bead area and the tread.

•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-

eter of the tire that contacts the road when

mounted on the vehicle.

•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or

a tire and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

•Maximum load rating: a figure indicating

the maximum load in pounds and kilo-

grams that can be carried by the tire. This

rating is established by the tire manufac-

turer.

•Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure: the greatest amount of air pressure

that should ever be put in the tire. This limit

is set by the tire manufacturer.

•Recommended tire inflation pressure:

inflation pressure, established by Volvo,

which is based on the type of tires that are

mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This

information can be found on the tire infla-

tion placard(s) located on the driver's side

B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this

chapter.

•Cold tires: The tires are considered to be

cold when they have the same temperature

as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-

perature is normally reached after the vehi-

cle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

182

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-

mum return of vehicle design performance.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself

with the following terms for determining your

vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a

trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/ Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/

CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-

tion placard.

Curb weight

The weight of the vehicle including a full tank

of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not

include passengers, cargo, or optional equip-

ment.

Capacity weight

All weight added to the curb weight, including

cargo and optional equipment. When towing,

trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo

weight.

NOTE

For trailer towing information, please refer to

the section "Towing a trailer."

Permissible axle weight

The maximum allowable weight that can be

carried by a single axle (front or rear). These

numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/

CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must

never exceed its maximum permissible weight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-

gers.

A table listing important weight limits for your

vehicle, is in chapter "Dimension and weights".

For the location of the various labels in your

vehicle, see page 276

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

•Locate the statement "the combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-

cle's placard.

•Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.

•Subtract the combined weight of the driver

and passengers from XXX kilograms or

XXX pounds.

•The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount

equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage

load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x

150) = 650 lbs.)

•Determine the combined weight of luggage

and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.

That weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

•If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to your

vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine

how this reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING

•Exceeding the permissible axle weight,

gross vehicle weight, or any other

weight rating limits can cause tire over-

heating resulting in permanent defor-

mation or catastrophic failure.

•Do not use replacement tires with lower

load carrying capacities than the tires

that were original equipment on the

vehicle because this will lower the vehi-

cle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the

correct load carrying capacity. Consult

your Volvo retailer for information.

1For "Towing a trailer" see page 158.

07 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

183

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST

CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE

GRADES

Quality grades can be found, where appli-

cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire gra-

ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)

times as well on the government course as a

tire graded 100. The relative performance of

tires depends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and many depart signifi-

cantly from the norm due to variation in driving

habits, maintenance practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test sur-

faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on braking (straight-ahead) traction

tests and is not a measure of cornering

(turning) traction.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds

to a minimum level of performance that all pas-

senger vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-

eral Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of performance

on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-

lished for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-

inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can cause heat

buildup and tire failure.

07 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

184

Snow chains

Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with

the following restrictions:

•Snow chains should be installed on front

wheels only. Use only Volvo approved

snow chains.

•If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires

and wheels are installed and are of a size

different than the original tires and wheels,

chains in some cases CANNOT be used.

Sufficient clearances between chains and

brakes, suspension and body components

must be maintained.

•Some strap-on type chains will interfere

with brake components and therefore

CANNOT be used.

•All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains

should only be installed on the front

wheels.

•Certain size tires may not allow the assem-

bly of snow chains/traction devices.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow

chain information.

CAUTION

•Check local regulations regarding the

use of snow chains before installing.

•Always follow the chain manufacturer's

installation instructions carefully. Install

chains as tightly as possible and

retighten periodically.

•Never exceed the chain manufacturer's

specified maximum speed limit. (Under

no circumstances should you exceed

31 mph (50 km/h)).

•Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns

when driving with snow chains.

•The handling of the vehicle can be

adversely affected when driving with

chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well

as locked wheel braking.

Snow tires, studded tires1

Tires for winter use:

•Owners who live in or regularly commute

through areas with sustained periods of

snow or icy driving conditions are strongly

advised to fit suitable winter tires to help

retain the highest degree of traction.

•It is important to install winter tires on all

four wheels to help retain traction during

cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-

ure to do so could reduce traction to an

unsafe level or adversely affect handling.

•Do not mix tires of different design as this

could also negatively affect overall tire road

grip.

•Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads

in warm weather. They should be removed

when the winter driving season has ended.

•Studded tires should be run-in

300-600 miles (500-1000 km) during which

the vehicle should be driven as smoothly

as possible to give the studs the opportu-

nity to seat properly in the tires. The tires

should have the same rotational direction

throughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE

Please consult state or provincial regula-

tions restricting the use of studded winter

tires before installing such tires.

1Where permitted

07 Wheels and tires

Temporary spare

185

The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Tem-

porary Spare".

Recommended tire pressure (see the placard

on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should

be maintained irrespective of which position on

the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used.

In the event of damage to this tire, a new one

can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the

"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem-

porary replacement for a punctured tire. It

must be replaced as soon as possible by a

standard tire. Road holding and handling

may be affected with the "Temporary

Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph

(80 km/h).

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be driven with wheels

of different dimensions or with a spare tire

other than the one that came with the vehi-

cle. The use of different size wheels can

seriously damage your vehicle's transmis-

sion.

1Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing

system* that enables you to temporarily seal a

hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,

or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.

The system consists of an air compressor, a

container for the sealing compound, wiring to

connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical

system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a

hose used to connect the system to the tire’s

inflation valve.

The 12-volt sockets are located on the rear side

of the center console (in the rear seat) and in

the cargo area.

Accessing the tire sealing system

The tire sealing system is stowed under the

floor of the cargo area. To access it:

1. Fold up or remove any protective floor cov-

ering or carpet.

2. Open the floor hatch.

3. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

•The tire sealing system is only intended

to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not

the sidewall.

•Tires with large holes or tears cannot be

repaired with the tire sealing system.

•After use, stow the tire sealing system

properly to help prevent rattling.

WARNING

•After using the tire sealing system, the

vehicle should not be driven farther than

approximately 120 miles (200 km).

•Have the tire inspected by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician as

soon as possible to determine if it can

be permanently repaired or must be

replaced.

•The vehicle should not be driven faster

than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire

that has been temporarily repaired with

the tire sealing system.

•After using the tire sealing system, drive

carefully and avoid abrupt steering

maneuvers and sudden stops.

Tire sealing system–overview

G020400

Speed limit sticker

On/Off switch

Electrical wire

Bottle holder (orange cover)

Protective hose cover

Air release knob

Hose

Bottle with sealing compound

Air pressure gauge

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

187

WARNING

Please keep the following points in mind

when using the tire sealing system:

•The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in

the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol

and natural rubber-latex. These sub-

stances are harmful if swallowed.

•The contents of this bottle may cause

allergic skin reactions or otherwise be

potentially harmful to the skin, the cen-

tral nervous system, and the eyes.

Precautions:

•Keep out of reach of children.

•Do not ingest the contents.

•Avoid prolonged or repeated contact

with the skin.

•Hands should be washed thoroughly

after handling.

First aid:

•Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with

soap and water. Get medical attention

if symptoms occur.

•Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least

15 minutes, occasionally lifting the

upper and lower eyelids. Get medical

attention if symptoms occur.

•Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air.

If irritation persists, get medical atten-

tion.

Tire sealing system–temporarily

repairing a flat tire

G019723

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two

stages:

•Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping

sealing compound into the tire. The car is

then driven a short distance to distribute

the sealing compound in the tire.

NOTE

Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,

etc.) from the tire before using the sealing

system.

•Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is

checked and adjusted if necessary.

WARNING

•Never leave the tire sealing system

unattended when it is operating.

•Keep the tire sealing system away from

children.

•Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off

the road and away from moving traffic.

•Apply the parking brake.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.

2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it

to the steering wheel hub where it will be

clearly visible to the driver.

3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position

0 (the 0 side of the switch should be

pressed down).

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

188

4. Put on the gloves included in the tire seal-

ing system.

WARNING

Contact with the sealing compound may

cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash

the affected area immediately with soap and

water.

5. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle

holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle

of sealing compound.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. This

occurs automatically when the bottle is

screwed into the holder.

6. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

WARNING

The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep

it securely in place and help prevent sealing

compound leakage. Once in place, the bot-

tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done

by a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

7. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-

tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys-

tem’s hose connector onto the valve as

tightly as possible by hand.

8. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

9. Start the vehicle’s engine.

10. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor

by pressing the on/off switch to position I.

WARNING

•Never stand next to the tire being inflated

when the compressor is in operation.

•If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,

switch off the compressor immediately.

•If there is visible damage to the sidewall

or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.

The vehicle should not be driven if this

occurs. Contact a towing service or

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if

applicable.

NOTE

The air pressure gauge will temporarily

show an increase in pressure to approxi-

mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com-

pound is being pumped into the tire. The

pressure should return to a normal level

after approximately 30 seconds.

11. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to

between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch

off the compressor briefly to get a clear

reading from the pressure gauge.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

WARNING

If the pressure remains below 22 psi

(1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes,

turn off the compressor. In this case, the

hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle

should not be driven.

12. Switch off the compressor and disconnect

the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

189

13. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation

valve and reinstall the valve cap.

14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-

mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed

of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-

ing compound in the tire.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the

use of the sealing compound may lead to

incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare

cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.

Use the tire sealing system to check and

adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.

NOTE

•Safely stow the tire sealing system in a

convenient place as it will soon be used

again to check the tire’s inflation pres-

sure.

•The empty bottle of sealing compound

cannot be removed from the bottle

holder. Consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician to have the

bottle removed and properly disposed

of.

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering

behavior, or noises should occur while driv-

ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a

safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,

cracks, or other visible damage, and

recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure

is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue

driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure

1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri-

bed in stage 1.

2. Refer to the inflation pressure tables for the

correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs

to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s

compressor. If necessary, release air from

the tire by turning the air release knob

counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

WARNING

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1

hour, check the inflation pressure in the

damaged tire again before continuing.

Replacing the sealing compound

container

The sealing compound container must be

replaced if:

•the tire sealing system has been used to

repair a tire

•the container’s expiration date has passed

(see the date on decal).

NOTE

•After use, the sealing compound bottle,

the hose, and certain other system

components must be replaced. Please

consult your Volvo retailer for replace-

ment parts.

•If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-

ration date has passed, please take it to

a Volvo retailer or a recycling station

that can properly dispose of harmful

substances.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

190

Inflating tires

The tire sealing system can be used to inflate

the tires. To do so:

1. Park the car in a safe place.

2. The compressor should be switched off.

Ensure that the on/off switch is in position

0 (the 0 side of the switch should be

pressed down).

3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.

4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-

tion valve and screw the hose connector

onto the valve as tightly as possible by

hand.

5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

•The vehicle’s engine should be running

when the tire sealing system is used to

avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure

the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated

place, or outdoors, before using the sys-

tem.

•Children should never be left unattended

in the vehicle when the engine is running.

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the

gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to

get a clear reading from the pressure

gauge.

8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the cor-

rect inflation pressure. If the tire needs to

be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s

compressor (press the on/off switch to

position I). If necessary, release air from the

tire by turning the air release knob coun-

terclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off

switch to position 0) when the correct infla-

tion pressure has been reached.

10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation

valve and reinstall the valve cap.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the 12-

volt socket.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

191

G030879

Jack location

Changing wheels

Location of the jack

The jack is located in the center under the rear

hatch in the cargo area floor. Lift this hatch and

release the retaining strap to slide out the jack.

The rear section of the jack's crank and the tool

bag are stowed to the left under the hatch. The

front section of the crank is stored in the tool

bag.

The rear section of the crank is enclosed in a

protective sleeve that should be slid off before

the crank is used. We recommend reinserting

the crank into this sleeve before the crank is

stowed.

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional gro-

cery bag holder: Fold up the rear section of the

cargo area floor, disconnect the grocery bag

holder's retaining cords and fold up the lower

section of the floor.

NOTE

The rear section of the crank is enclosed in

a protective sleeve that should be slid off

before the crank is used. We recommend

reinserting the crank into this sleeve before

the crank is stowed.

CAUTION

Seven-seat models: Do not store objects

in the area for the rear seat cushions (when

the backrests are to be folded down). This

could damage the cushions.

Lowering the spare wheel

The spare wheel is located under the floor of

the rear cargo compartment. It can be lowered

using the crank (see previous page for loca-

tion).

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

192

WARNING

When raising or lowering the spare wheel,

please keep in mind that components in the

exhaust system may be very hot.

To lower the spare wheel:

1. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate.

2. Fold up the rear section of the floor in the

cargo compartment.

3. Connect the two sections of the jack's

crank.

4. Insert the hooked end of the crank in the

spare wheel retaining attachment.

5. Lower the spare wheel under the vehicle by

turning the crank counterclockwise until it

is not possible to turn it further.

6. Pivot the toggle at the end of the cable 90

degrees to release it from the spare wheel

CAUTION

When the spare wheel is mounted on the

vehicle, the retaining cable could damage

the underside of the vehicle if it is not retrac-

ted.

7. Crank up the cable again by turning the

crank clockwise.

8. Place the wheel with the flat tire in the vehi-

cle's cargo compartment.

NOTE

The space under the vehicle is designed to

hold the special spare wheel only. Other full-

size wheels will not fit in this compartment.

G026996

Returning the spare wheel to the storage

compartment

1. Use the crank (turn it counterclockwise) to

lower the spare wheel's retaining cable.

2. Pass the toggle at the end of the cable

through the center hole in the spare wheel.

Pivot the toggle 90 degrees so that when

raised, the wheel will rest on the toggle.

3. Retract the retaining cable slightly by

slowly turning the crank clockwise several

times.

4. Position the wheel so that it is not obstruc-

ted by components in the exhaust system.

5. Continue to raise the wheel by turning the

crank clockwise. Raise the wheel a little bit

at a time and guide it around the rear axle

until it is securely seated in the storage

area.

6. When it is no longer possible to turn the

crank any further, check that the spare

wheel is securely in position in the storage

compartment.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

193

G026997

Jack attachment points

Jack attachments

There are two attachment points for the jack on

each side of the vehicle. These attachment

points are under the center of each door.

WARNING

There is an attachment point on each side

of the vehicle located under the pillars

between the front and rear doors. This point

is used during the production process only,

and is NOT intended for attaching the jack.

G020332

WARNING

The undersides of accessory running

boards are not intended for attaching the

jack.

Changing a wheel

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slip-

pery surface.

2. Engage the parking brake and put the gear

selector in the Park position.

3. Loosen the wheel bolts by exerting down-

ward pressure on the lug wrench.

4. Remove the wheel cover (where applica-

ble) using the lug wrench in the tool bag.

5. With the wheels still on the ground, use the

lug wrench to loosen the wheel bolts 1/2 – 1

turn. Turn the bolts counterclockwise to

loosen the bolts.

G027000

Attaching the jack

6. Place the jack on the ground, under one of

the attachment points (see the illustration)

and crank while simultaneously guiding the

jack's attachment bracket onto the attach-

ment point (see illustration) The base of the

jack must be flat on a level, firm, non-slip-

pery surface. Before raising the vehicle,

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

194

check that the jack is still correctly posi-

tioned in the attachment.

7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be

changed is lifted off the ground.

8. Unscrew the wheel bolts completely and

carefully remove the wheel so as not to

damage the threads on the studs.

NOTE

To avoid excessive wear and the necessity

of rebalancing, mark and reinstall wheels in

the same location and position as before

removal. To lessen the chance of imbal-

ance, each wheel hub is equipped with a

guide stud to ensure that a removed wheel

can be reinstalled in its original position (as

when changing over to winter tires/wheels).

CAUTION

•The vehicle must not be driven with

wheels of different dimensions or with a

spare tire other than the one that came

with the vehicle. The use of different size

wheels can seriously damage your vehi-

cle's transmission.

•Correct tightening torque on wheel

bolts must be observed.

•The wheel bolts should never be

greased or lubricated.

•Extended, chromed wheel bolts must

not be used with steel rims, as they

make it impossible to fit the hub caps.

Installing the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel

and hub.

2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

3. Install the wheel bolts and tighten hand-

tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-

wise until all bolts are snug.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-

nately tighten the bolts crosswise to

103 ft.lbs. (140 Nm).

5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).

WARNING

•The jack must correctly engage the bar

in the jack attachment. The vehicle's

weight must not rest on the jack attach-

ment. See illustration "Attaching the

jack" on the previous page.

•Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-

slippery surface.

•Never allow any part of your body to be

extended under a vehicle supported by

a jack.

•Use the jack intended for the vehicle

when replacing a wheel. For any other

job, use stands to support the side of

the vehicle being worked on.

•Apply the parking brake and put the

gear selector in the (P)ark position.

•Block the wheels standing on the

ground, use rigid wooden blocks or

large stones.

•The jack should be kept well-greased

and clean, and should not be damaged.

•No objects should be placed between

the base of jack and the ground, or

between the jack and the attachment

bar on the vehicle.

The jack and tools should be returned to their

storage spaces. The jack should be cranked

down fully so that it fits into the intended space.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

195

The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses sen-

sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla-

tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov-

ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit

inflation pressure data to a receiver located in

the vehicle.

USA – FCC ID: MRXG403MA4A

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

When low inflation pressure is detected,

TPMS will light up the tire pressure warning

light (also referred to as a telltale) in the

instrument panel (see page 61), and will dis-

play a message in the text window. The

wording of this message is determined by

the degree of inflation pressure loss.

AOn certain models, the FCC code is MRXTG315AM04

When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS

will light up the tire pressure warning light

(also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument

panel and will display one of the following mes-

sages in the text window: LOW TIRE PRESS.

CHECK TIRES or VERY LOW TIRE

PRESSURE.

NOTE

If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure

warning light will flash for approximately

1 minute and TIRE PRESS SYST

SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-

sure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel

efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute

for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-

er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not reached

the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low

tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain

continuously illuminated. This sequence will

continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as

long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may

occur for a variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS

from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one

or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

1This system is standard on U.S. models and optional on Canadian models

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

196

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires

and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

NOTE

TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does

not replace normal tire maintenance. For

information on correct tire pressure, please

refer to the Tire inflation pressure tables or

consult your Volvo retailer.

Erasing warning messages

When a low tire pressure warning message has

been displayed, and the tire pressure warning

light has come on:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the

inflation pressure of all four tires.

2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure

(consult the tire pressure placard or the

table see page 177).

3. Drive the vehicle for several minutes at a

speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster.

> This will erase the warning text and the

warning light will go out.

WARNING

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire

failure, resulting in a loss of control of the

vehicle.

Changing wheels with TPMS

Please note the following when changing or

replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/

tires on the vehicle:

•Only the factory-mounted wheels are

equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.

•If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary

spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS

sensor.

•If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun-

ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST

SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed

each time the vehicle is driven above

25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.

•Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,

the warning message should not reappear.

•Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be

fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.

Volvo does not recommend moving sen-

sors back and forth between sets of

wheels.

NOTE

If a tire is changed or if the TPMS sensor is

moved to another wheel, the sensor’s seal,

nut and valve core should be replaced.

CAUTION

When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press

the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the

valve to help avoid bending or otherwise

damaging the valve.

Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models

only)

In certain cases, it may be necessary to reca-

librate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom-

mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-

tion pressure table on page 178), for example,

if higher inflation pressure is necessary when

transporting heavy loads, etc.

To recalibrate:

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and

turn the ignition key to position I or II (see

page 141 for additional information).

3. Turn the thumb wheel on the left-side

steering wheel lever until Tire pressure

Calibration appears in the display.

4. Press and hold the Reset button on the

left-side steering wheel lever until TIRE

PRESSURE CALIBRATED is displayed.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

197

Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian

models only)

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Turn the ignition key to position I or II.

3. Press and hold the Reset button on the

left-side steering wheel lever until TIRE

PRESS SYST OFF is displayed.

Repeat steps 1-3 to turn TPMS on again.

198

Washing and cleaning the vehicle........................................................ 200

Paint touch up....................................................................................... 204

CAR CARE

08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the vehicle

200

Washing

•The vehicle should be washed at regular

intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar

spots adhere to the paint and may cause

damage. It is particularly important to wash

the vehicle frequently in the wintertime to

prevent corrosion, when salt has been

used on the roads.

•When washing the vehicle, do not expose

it to direct sunlight. Use lukewarm water to

soften the dirt before you wash with a

sponge, and plenty of water, to avoid

scratching.

•Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork as

soon as possible. Otherwise the finish may

be permanently damaged.

•A detergent can be used to facilitate the

softening of dirt and oil.

CAUTION

Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-plated

wheels using the same detergents used for

the body of the vehicle. Aggressive wheel

cleaning agents can permanently stain

chrome-plated wheels.

•Dry the vehicle with a clean chamois and

remember to clean the drain holes in the

doors and rocker panels.

•Tar spots can be removed with tar remover

after the vehicle has been washed.

•A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy

water can be used to clean the wiper

blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-

shield and wiper blades improves visibility

considerably and also helps prolong the

service life of the wiper blades.

•Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel

housings, fenders, etc.).

•In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-

quent washing is recommended.

Suitable detergents

Special vehicle washing detergents should be

used. A suitable mixture is about 2.5 fl. oz.

(8.5 cl) of detergent to 2.6 US gal. (10 liters) of

warm water. After washing with a detergent the

vehicle should be well rinsed with clean water.

CAUTION

•Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-

ber components

•Polishing chromed strips can wear

away or damage the surface

•Polishes containing abrasive sub-

stances should not be used

CAUTION

•Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can

reduce lighting capacity considerably.

Clean the headlights regularly, for

example when refueling.

•During high pressure washing, the

spray mouthpiece must never be closer

to the vehicle than 13 " (30 cm). Do not

spray into the locks.

Special moonroof cautions:

•Always close the moonroof and sun

shade before washing your vehicle.

•Never use abrasive cleaning agents on

the moonroof.

•Never use wax on the rubber seals

around the moonroof.

Exterior components

Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning

products, available at your Volvo retailer, for

cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental

components such as chromed strips on the

exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for

using these products should be followed care-

fully. Solvents or stain removers should not be

used.

08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the vehicle

201

CAUTION

•Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-

ber components

•Polishing chromed strips can wear

away or damage the surface

•Polishes containing abrasive sub-

stances should not be used

NOTE

When washing the vehicle, remember to

remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors

and sills.

WARNING

•When the vehicle is driven immediately

after being washed, apply the brakes

several times in order to remove any

moisture from the brake linings.

•Engine cleaning agents should not be

used when the engine is warm. This

constitutes a fire risk.

Automatic washing – simple and quick

•We do NOT recommend washing your

vehicle in an automatic wash during the

first few months (because the paint will not

have hardened sufficiently).

•An automatic wash is a simple and quick

way to clean your vehicle, but it is worth

remembering that it may not be as thor-

ough as when you yourself go over the

vehicle with sponge and water. Keeping

the underbody clean is most important,

especially in the winter. Some automatic

washers do not have facilities for washing

the underbody.

•Before driving into an automatic car wash,

make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary

lamps, etc, are secure, and that any

antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Oth-

erwise there is risk of the machine dislodg-

ing them.

Exterior lighting

Condensation may form temporarily on the

inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as

headlights, fog lights, or tail lights. This is nor-

mal and the lights are designed to withstand

moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi-

pate after the lights have been on for a short

time.

Polishing and waxing

•Normally, polishing is not required during

the first year after delivery, however, wax-

ing may be beneficial.

•Before applying polish or wax the vehicle

must be washed and dried. Tar spots can

be removed with kerosene or tar remover.

Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing

compound.

•After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

•Several commercially available products

contain both polish and wax.

•Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-

ishing a dull surface.

•A wide range of polymer-based car waxes

can be purchased today. These waxes are

easy to use and produce a long-lasting,

high-gloss finish that protects the body-

work against oxidation, road dirt and fad-

ing.

•Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct

sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should

not be warmer than 113° F (45° C).

08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the vehicle

202

CAUTION

Volvo does not recommend the use of long-

life or durable paint protection coatings,

some of which may claim to prevent pitting,

fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have

not been tested by Volvo for compatibility

with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them

may cause the clear coat to soften, crack,

or cloud. Damage caused by application of

paint protection coatings may not be cov-

ered under your vehicle's paint warranty.

Mirrors with the water repellent glass

coating

•Do not apply wax, degreasing agents, etc

to this glass. This could damage the coa-

ting.

•Clean the glass surface with care to avoid

scratching.

NOTE

The water repellent coating is subject to

natural wear

•In order to maintain the coating's water

repellent characteristics, it should be trea-

ted with a special compound that is avail-

able at your Volvo retailer.

•This treatment should be carried out for the

first time after three years, and thereafter

once a year.

Cleaning the upholstery

Fabric

Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For

more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,

shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric

stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Interior plastic components

Cleaning interior plastic components should

be done with a cleaning agent specially

designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo

retailer.

Alcantera™ suede-like material

Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a

soft cloth and mild soap solution.

Leather care

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured

with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,

sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the

protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and

fading can result.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy

leather care kit formulated to clean and beau-

tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the

protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner

removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream

protectant restores a barrier against soil and

sunlight.

Volvo also offers a special leather softener that

should be applied after the cleaner and pro-

tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and

reduces friction between leather and other fin-

ishes in the vehicle.

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and

conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four

times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about

Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-

ener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery

1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge

and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the

sponge with circular movements.

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the

sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,

do not rub.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a

towel, and allow the leather to dry com-

pletely.

08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the vehicle

203

Protecting leather upholstery

1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on

a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream

to the upholstery with light circular move-

ments.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining and

protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

CAUTION

•Under no circumstances should gaso-

line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents

be used on the plastic or the leather

since these can cause damage.

•Take extra care when removing stains

such as ink or lipstick since the coloring

can spread.

•Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-

vent can damage the seat padding.

•Start from the outside of the stain and

work toward the center.

•Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a

pocket) or velcro fasteners on clothing

may damage the textile upholstery.

•Clothing that is not colorfast, such as

new jeans or suede garments, may stain

the upholstery.

Cleaning the seat belts

Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild

soap solution.

Cleaning floor mats

The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed

clean regularly, especially during winter when

they should be taken out for drying. Spots on

textile mats can be removed with a mild deter-

gent.

08 Car care

Paint touch up

204

G031024

Model plate with paint color code (1).1

Paint damage requires immediate attention to

avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish

regularly – when washing the vehicle for

instance. Touch-up if necessary.

Paint repairs require special equipment and

skill. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician for any extensive damage.

Minor scratches can be repaired by using

Volvo touch-up paint.

Color code

Make sure you have the right color. The color

code number is on the model plate in the

engine compartment.

Minor stone chips and scratches

Material:

•Primer – can

•Paint – touch-up pen

•Brush

•Masking tape

•If the stone chip has not gone down to the

bare metal and an undamaged color coat

remains, you can add paint immediately

after removing dirt.

NOTE

When touching up the vehicle, it should be

clean and dry. The surface temperature

should be above 60° F (15° C).

Minor scratches on the surface

If the stone chip has not penetrated down to

the metal and an undamaged layer of paint

remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as

soon as the spot has been cleaned.

G020345

Deep scratches

•Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-

aged surface. Pull the tape off so that any

loose flakes of paint adhere to it.

•Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with

a small brush. When the primer surface is

dry, the paint can be applied using a brush.

Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin

paint coats and let dry after each applica-

tion.

If there is a longer scratch, you may want to

protect surrounding paint by masking it off.

1The model plate is located on the passenger's side center door pillar.

08 Car care

205

206

Volvo service......................................................................................... 208

Maintaining your vehicle....................................................................... 209

Working on your vehicle........................................................................ 211

Engine compartment............................................................................. 213

Engine oil............................................................................................... 214

Fluids..................................................................................................... 217

Wiper blades......................................................................................... 219

Battery................................................................................................... 220

Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 223

Fuses..................................................................................................... 230

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

09 Maintenance and servicing

Volvo service

208

Maintenance service

Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi-

cle running well. Your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet provides a com-

prehensive maintenance schedule up to

150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle service.

This maintenance program contains inspec-

tions and services necessary for the proper

function of your vehicle, and includes compo-

nents that affect vehicle emissions. The main-

tenance services contain several checks that

require special instruments and tools and

therefore must be performed by a qualified

technician. Volvo advises you to follow the

service program outlined in this booklet. To

keep your Volvo in top condition, specify time-

tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts and

Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.

The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle

manufacturers to furnish written instructions to

the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper

servicing and function of the components that

control emissions. These services, which are

listed in the "Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet," are not covered by the

warranty. You will be required to pay for labor

and material used.

Maintenance services

Your Volvo passed several major inspections

before it was delivered to you, in accordance

with Volvo specifications. The maintenance

services outlined in the Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet, many of which

will positively affect your vehicle's emissions,

should be performed as indicated. It is recom-

mended that receipts for vehicle emission

services be retained in case questions arise

concerning maintenance.

Inspection and service should also be per-

formed anytime a malfunction is observed or

suspected.

Applicable warranties

In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana-

dian regulations, the following list of warranties

is provided.

•New Car Limited Warranty

•Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

•Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

•Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tems Limited Warranty

•Emission Design and Defect Warranty

•Emission Performance Warranty

These are the Federal warranties; other war-

ranties are provided as required by state/pro-

vincial law. Refer to your separate Warranty

and Service Records Information booklet for

detailed information concerning each of the

warranties.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Maintaining your vehicle

209

Owner maintenance

Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-

vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty

and Service Records Information booklet.

The following points can be carried out

between the normally scheduled maintenance

services.

Each time the vehicle is refueled

•Check the engine oil level

•Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,

headlights, and tail lights

Monthly

•Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect

the tires for wear.

•Check that engine coolant and other fluid

levels are between the

indicated "min" and "max" markings.

•Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass

cleaner and soft paper towels.

•Wipe driver information displays with a soft

cloth.

•Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-

rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-

minal connector, or a battery near the end

of its useful service life. Consult a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician for

additional information.

As needed

•Wash the vehicle, including the undercar-

riage, to reduce wear that can be caused

by a buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can

be caused by salt residues.

•Clean leaves and twigs from air intake

vents at the base of the windshield, and

from other places where they may collect.

•Complete service information for qualified

technicians is available online for purchase

or subscription at www.volvote-

chinfo.com.

Emission inspection readiness

What is an Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II)?

OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized

engine management system. It stores diagnos-

tic information about your vehicle's emission

controls. It can light the Check Engine light

(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A

"fault" is a component or system that is not

performing within an expected range. A fault

may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will

store a message about any fault.

How do states use OBD II for emission

inspections?

Many states connect a computer directly to a

vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can

then read "faults." In some states, this type of

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission

test.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission

inspection?

Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-

tion for any of the following reasons.

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your

vehicle may fail inspection.

•If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,

but went out without any action on your

part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.

Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending

on the inspection practices in your area.

•If you had recent service that required dis-

connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic

information may be incomplete and "not

ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not

ready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II

emission inspection?

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or

was lit but went out without service, have

your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,

serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

•If you recently had service for a lit Check

Engine light, or if you had service that

required disconnecting the battery, a

period of driving is necessary to bring the

OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A

half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-

09 Maintenance and servicing

Maintaining your vehicle

210

way driving is typically needed to allow

OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo

retailer can provide you with more infor-

mation on planning a trip.

•Maintain your vehicle in accordance with

your vehicle's maintenance schedule.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Working on your vehicle

211

Note the following before you begin working

on your vehicle:

Battery

•Ensure that the battery cables are correctly

connected and tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running (e.g., when replacing the

battery).

•Never use a fast charger to charge the bat-

tery. The battery cables should be discon-

nected when recharging.

•The battery contains acid that is both cor-

rosive and poisonous. It is important that

the battery is handled in an environmen-

tally friendly way. See page 220 for more

information on handling the battery.

Hoisting the vehicle

G027001

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the

two jack attachments points should be used.

They are specially reinforced to bear the weight

of the vehicle (see the illustration). A garage

jack can also be placed under the front of the

engine support frame. Take care not to dam-

age the splash guard under the engine. Ensure

that the jack is positioned so that the vehicle

cannot slide off it. Always use axle stands or

similar structures. The vehicle's gross vehicle

weight is between 5770 lbs (2630 kg) and

6080 lbs (2760 kg). Use a jack and stands rated

for this weight.

If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the

front and rear lift arm pads should be centered

under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard

edge of the sill rail (see illustration).

WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltage!

The voltage in the ignition system is dan-

gerous!

Do not touch spark plugs, ignition cables or

the ignition coil when the engine is running

or the ignition is switched on!

The ignition should be switched off when:

•Conducting engine tests.

•Replacing parts in the ignition system,

such as spark plugs, ignition coil, dis-

tributor, ignition cables, etc.

WARNING

Never try to repair any part of the SRS/

SIPS/WHIPS/IC systems yourself. Any

interference in the system could cause mal-

function and serious injury. Any work should

only be performed by an authorized Volvo

workshop.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Working on your vehicle

212

Belt check

Check the belt regularly to make sure it is in

good condition and is clean. A worn or dirty belt

can cause poor cooling and low alternator out-

put as well as impair the operation of the power

steering and the air conditioning unit.

NOTE

The drive belt is equipped with a self-ten-

sioning mechanism and requires no adjust-

ment between changes.

WARNING

The engine must not be running when this

check is performed.

Check coolant level

The cooling system must be filled with coolant

and not leak to operate at maximum efficiency.

Check the coolant level regularly. The level

should be between the MAX and MIN marks

on the expansion tank. The check should be

made with particular thoroughness when the

engine is new or when the cooling system has

been drained.

Do not remove the filler cap other than for top-

ping up with coolant. Frequent removal may

prevent coolant circulation between the engine

and the expansion tank during engine warm up

and cooling.

Changing coolant

Normally, the coolant does not need to be

changed. If the system must be drained, con-

sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

Do not top off with water only. This reduces the

rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the

coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can

also cause damage to the cooling system if it

should freeze. Top off with Volvo Genuine

Coolant/Antifreeze only (a 50/50 mix of water

and antifreeze.

CAUTION

The cooling system must always be kept

filled to the correct level. If it is not kept filled,

there can be high local temperatures in the

engine which could result in damage. Dif-

ferent types of antifreeze/coolant may not

be mixed.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap while the

engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle cools.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Engine compartment

213

G027074

Brake fluid reservoir

Relay/fuse box

Air cleaner

Radiator

Dipstick-engine oil

Filler cap-engine oil

Washer fluid reservoir

Power steering fluid reservoir

Expansion tank-coolant

Data plate

Battery (under floor in rear cargo area)

WARNING

The cooling fan (located behind the radiator)

may start or continue to operate (for up to

6 minutes) after the engine has been

switched off.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Engine oil

214

Oil specifications

Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC

specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.

Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel

economy, engine performance, or engine pro-

tection.

Volvo recommends Castrol.

Depending on your driving habits, premium or

synthetic oils may provide superior fuel econ-

omy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo

retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician for recommendations on premium

or synthetic oils.

Oil additives must not be used.

NOTE

Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is

changed at the normal maintenance serv-

ices. This oil is only used at customer

request, at additional charge. Please con-

sult a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

Oil viscosity

Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life

under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

good fuel economy and engine protection. See

the viscosity chart.

G023491

Viscosity chart

Extreme engine operation

Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40

and complying with oil quality requirements are

recommended for driving in areas of sustained

temperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow-

ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro-

longed driving in mountainous areas.

American Petroleum Institute (API)

symbol

G022917

American Petroleum Institute (API) symbol

The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into

three parts:

•The upper section describes the oil's per-

formance level.

•The center identifies the oil's viscosity.

•The lower section indicates whether the oil

has demonstrated energy-conserving

properties in a standard test in comparison

to a reference oil.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Engine oil

215

NOTE

Volvo uses different systems to indicate a

low oil level or pressure. Some models have

an oil pressure sensor, in which case a

warning symbol (see page 60) is used to

indicate low oil pressure. Other models have

an oil level sensor, in which case the driver

is alerted by the warning symbol in the cen-

ter of the instrument panel and a text in the

information display. Some models use both

systems. Contact a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for more informa-

tion.

Changing engine oil and oil filter

See page 214 for oil specifications and page

285 for oil volumes. Refer to the Warranty and

Service Records Information booklet for infor-

mation on the oil change intervals.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of oil

additives.

Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is

changed at the normal maintenance inter-

vals except at owner request and at addi-

tional charge. Please consult a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

Checking and adding oil

G030880

Location of dipstick (1) and oil filler cap (2)

The oil level should be checked at regular inter-

vals, particularly during the period up to the

first scheduled maintenance service.

•The vehicle should be parked on a level

surface when the oil is checked.

•If the engine is warm, wait for at least

10-15 minutes after the engine has been

switched off before checking the oil.

Checking the oil

•Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint-

free rag.

•Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check

the oil level.

•Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to

the MIN mark, add approximately

1 US quart (1 liter) of oil.

•Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature.

•Switch off the engine and wait for at least

10-15 minutes and recheck the oil level. If

necessary, add oil until the level is near the

mark.

•Oil level should be between the MIN and

MAX marks on the dipstick.

G030881

09 Maintenance and servicing

Engine oil

216

CAUTION

Not checking the oil level regularly can result

in serious engine damage if the oil level

becomes too low.

•Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This

could cause an increase in oil consump-

tion.

•Not checking the oil level regularly can

result in serious engine damage if the oil

level becomes too low.

•Always add oil of the same type and

viscosity as already used.

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into

contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fluids

217

Washer fluid reservoir

G027097

Washer fluid reservoir

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the

engine compartment and holds approx.

6.8 US qts (6.5 liters).

When there is less than approximately 1 US qt

(1 liter) remaining in the reservoir, the washer

fluid spray will be directed to the windshield

only.

During cold weather, the reservoir should be

filled with windshield washer solvent contain-

ing antifreeze.

Changing coolant

G027087

Coolant reservoir

Normally, the coolant does not need to be

changed. If the system must be drained, con-

sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

CAUTION

•If necessary, top up the cooling system

with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze

only (a 50/50 mix of water and anti-

freeze).

•Different types of antifreeze/coolant

may not be mixed.

•If the cooling system is drained, it

should be flushed with clean water or

premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled

with the correct mixture of water/anti-

freeze.

•The cooling system must always be

kept filled to the correct level, and the

level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there

can be high local temperatures in the

engine which could result in damage.

Check coolant regularly!

•Do not top up with water only. This

reduces the rust-protective and anti-

freeze qualities of the coolant and has a

lower boiling point. It can also cause

damage to the cooling system if it

should freeze.

•Do not use chlorinated tap water in the

vehicle's cooling system.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fluids

218

WARNING

•Never remove the radiator cap while the

engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle

cools.

•If it is necessary to top up the coolant

when the engine is warm, unscrew the

expansion tank cap slowly so that the

overpressure dissipates.

Brake fluid reservoir

G000000

The brake fluid should always be above the

MIN mark on the side of the reservoir. Check,

without removing the cap, that there is suffi-

cient fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F

(>280 °C), P/N 9437433.

Replace: Every second year or 30,000 miles

(48,000 km). The fluid should be replaced once

a year or every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) when

driving under extremely hard conditions

(mountain driving, etc.).

Always entrust brake fluid changing to a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

•If the fluid level is below the MIN mark

in the reservoir or if a brake-related

message is shown in the information

display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician and have the brake

system inspected.

•Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any

other type of brake fluid.

Power steering fluid reservoir

FULL ADD

G026991

The fluid level should always be between the

ADD and FULL marks.

Fluid type: Volvo synthetic power steering fluid

(Pentosin CHF 11S) P/N 1161529 or equiva-

lent.

Replace: No fluid change required.

If a problem should occur in the power steering

system or if the vehicle has no electrical current

and must be towed, it is still possible to steer

the vehicle. However, keep in mind that greater

effort will be required to turn the steering

wheel.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Wiper blades

219

Windshield wiper blades To change a windshield wiper blade:

1. Fold the wiper arm out from the windshield

and hold the wiper blade.

2. Press in the grooved catches and pull out

the wiper blade.

3. Insert a new wiper blade and ensure that it

is securely in place.

NOTE

The driver's side wiper blade is longer than

the one on the passenger's side.

Tailgate wiper blade

G026959

To change a tailgate wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper arm rearward, away from the

tailgate window.

2. Pull out the wiper blade as shown in the

illustration.

3. Press the new wiper blade into place.

Check that it is properly secured.

NOTE

Keeping the windshield/tailgate window

and wiper blades clean helps improve visi-

bility and prolongs the service life of the

wiper blades, see page 200 for washing

instructions.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Battery

220

Battery maintenance

The battery in your vehicle is located under the

floor of the cargo compartment.

Driving habits and conditions, climate, the

number of starts, etc. all affect the service life

and function of the battery. In order for your

battery to perform satisfactorily, keep the fol-

lowing in mind:

•Use a screw driver to open the caps or

cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

•If necessary, add distilled water. The level

should never be above the indicator.

•The fluid level should be checked if the

battery has been recharged.

•After inspection, be sure the cap over each

battery cell or the cover is securely in

place.

•Check that the battery cables are correctly

connected and properly tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running, or when the key is in the

ignition. This could damage the vehicle's

electrical system.

•The battery should be disconnected from

the vehicle when a battery charger is used

directly on the battery.

•To help keep the battery in good condition,

the vehicle should be driven for at least 15

minutes a week or connected to a charger

with an automatic charging function.

•If the battery is fully discharged a number

of times, this may shorten its service life.

Keeping the battery fully charged helps

prolong its service life.

•The service life of a battery is affected by

factors such as driving conditions and cli-

mate. Extreme cold may also further

decrease the battery’s starting capacity.

•Because the battery’s starting capacity

decreases with time, it may be necessary

to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for

an extended period of time or if the vehicle

is usually only driven short distances.

•

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the state of California

to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

WARNING

•Never expose the battery to open flame

or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-

tact occurs, flush the affected area

immediately with water. Obtain medical

help immediately if eyes are affected.

NOTE

Used batteries should be properly disposed

of at a recycling station or similar facility, or

taken to your Volvo retailer.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Battery

221

Symbols

Wear protection goggles

See owner’s manual for

details

Keep away from children

Corrosive

No smoking, no open

flames, no sparks

Explosion

Replacing the battery

DRAIN PIPE

xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx

DISCONNECT

REMOVAL OF BATTERY

O CABLE FIRST

xxxx xxxxx xxxxx

xxxx xx

WARNING

xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx

G027076

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Wait at least 5 minutes after switching

off the ignition before disconnecting the

battery so that all information in the vehi-

cle's electrical system can be stored in the

control modules.

3. Remove the retaining bracket and unscrew

the cover over the battery. Wait at least

5 minutes after switching off the ignition

before disconnecting the battery so that all

information in the vehicle's electrical sys-

tem can be stored in the control modules.

4. Disconnect the negative (ground) cable

first.

G027075

09 Maintenance and servicing

Battery

222

5. Disconnect the positive cable and pull the

ventilation hose from the battery.

6. Lift out the old battery and put a new bat-

tery into place.

7. Connect the positive cable first.

8. Connect the negative (ground) cable.

9. Be sure that the ventilation hose is securely

connected to the battery and that the other

end of the hose is properly routed through

the ventilation opening in the floor of the

battery compartment.

G030884

Ventilation hose

10. Reinstall the cover and retaining bracket

and screw it securely in place.

NOTE

After the battery has been disconnected or

replaced, lock and unlock the vehicle with

the central locking system's remote key to

reactivate such features as the power win-

dows, moonroof, courtesy lighting, etc.

WARNING

•The battery generates hydrogen gas,

which is flammable and explosive. The

battery is fitted with a ventilation hose

which vents hydrogen gas out of the

battery compartment through a ventila-

tion opening in the bottom of this com-

partment. If the battery must be

replaced, it is essential that the ventila-

tion hose is properly connected to the

battery and that it is routed through the

ventilation opening provided (see illus-

tration).

•Be sure the ventilation hose is free of

debris.

•Only use replacement batteries equip-

ped with a ventilation hose. Consult a

trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 223

When replacing bulbs, keep the following

points in mind:

•Never touch the glass of bulbs with your

fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers

vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit

on the reflector, which will damage it.

•The optional Active Bending Light bulbs

contain trace amounts of mercury. These

bulbs should always be disposed of by an

authorized Volvo retailer.

The following bulbs should only be replaced by

a trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian:

•Active Bending Lights

•Courtesy (dome) lighting

•Reading lights

•Glove compartment lights

•Turn signals and courtesy lights in the side

door mirrors

•High-mounted brake lights

Replacing high/low beams/turn signal/

parking light bulbs

WARNING

•The engine should not be running when

changing bulbs.

•If the engine has been running just prior

to replacing bulbs in the headlight hous-

ing, please keep in mind that compo-

nents in the engine compartment will be

hot.

G027081

The entire lamp housing must be lifted out

when replacing these bulbs.

To lift out the lamp housing:

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Open the hood.

3. Pull up the retaining pins (see the illustra-

tion).

4. Lift out the lamp housing.

G027083

WARNING

Active Bending Lights* - due to the high

voltage used by these headlights, these

bulbs should only be replaced by a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs

224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Location of the bulbs in the headlight

housing

G027082

Low beam headlight/Active Bending

Lights*

High beam headlight

Turn signal

Parking light

Side marker light

Replacing the low beam bulb (Halogen

headlights)

G027088

1. Remove the plastic cover over the bulb by

turning it counterclockwise.

2. Pull the connector from the lamp housing.

3. Loosen the bulb's retaining spring by first

moving it to the right and then moving it out

of the way.

4. Pull out the bulb from the holder.

5. Insert the new bulb (without touching the

glass) in the holder.

6. Move the retaining spring up and push it

slightly to the left until it seats properly.

7. Press the bulb holder into place on the

headlight housing.

8. Reinstall the plastic cap. The let-

ters "HAUT" on the cap must be upward.

Replacing the high beam bulb (Halogen

headlights)

G027085

1. Remove the rubber cover by pulling it off.

2. Pull the connector from the lamp housing.

3. Loosen the bulb's retaining spring by first

moving it to the right and then moving it out

of the way.

4. Pull out the bulb from the holder.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs

225

5. Insert the new bulb (without touching the

glass) in the holder.

6. Move the retaining spring up and push it

slightly to the left until it seats properly.

7. Press the bulb holder into place on the

headlight housing.

8. Press the rubber cover into place.

Replacing the high beam bulb (Active

Bending Lights)

G027090

1. Remove the rubber cover over the bulb by

pulling it off.

2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and

pull it out of the headlight housing.

3. Remove the connector from the bulb unit

by pressing the lock tab out and pulling.

4. Connect the connector to the new bulb unit

until it clicks into place.

5. Press a new bulb unit into the headlight

housing and turn it clockwise into place.

6. Reinstall the plastic cover.

Replacing parking light/side marker

light bulbs

G028409

1. Turn the lamp holder approximately 1/4

turn counterclockwise and pull it out of the

headlight housing.

2. Pull the bulb straight out.

3. Align the guide lugs on the side of the base

of the new bulb in the grooves in the holder

and press it into place.

4. Press the lamp holder into the place in the

headlight housing and turn it approxi-

mately 1/4 turn clockwise.

Replacing the turn signal bulb

G027089

1. Turn the lamp holder approximately 1/4

turn counterclockwise and pull it out of the

headlight housing.

2. Press in the bulb slightly and pull it out of

the holder.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs

226

3. Align the guide lugs on the side of the base

of the new bulb in the grooves in the holder.

Press it in and turn it slightly clockwise.

4. Press the lamp holder into the place in the

headlight housing and turn it approxi-

mately 1/4 turn clockwise.

Front fog lights

G027078

NOTE

Avoid touching the glass on the bulb with

your fingers.

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Turn the bulb holder slightly counterclock-

wise to release it.

3. Replace the bulb. The shape of the foot of

the bulb corresponds to the shape of the

bulb holder.

4. Reinstall the bulb holder by turning it

slightly clockwise. The side of the holder

marked TOP should face upward.

Location of tail light bulbs

G027094

Parking light

Turn signal

Back-up light

Parking light

Brake light

NOTE

If the message indicating a burned out bulb

remains in the information display after a

bulb has been replaced, consult a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs

227

Replacing bulbs in the taillight cluster

G027077

1. Switch off all lights and turn ignition key to

position 0.

2. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate,

and fold up the rear section of the cargo

area floor.

3. If the vehicle is equipped with the optional

grocery bag holder, detach the holder's

bands.

4. Remove the corner panel.

5. Open the cover in the side panel by pulling

the tab upward/outward.

6. Loosen the bolts.

7. Pull the entire tail light housing straight out.

8. Disconnect the wiring.

9. Place the tail light housing on a soft cloth

to avoid scratching the lens.

10. Turn the lamp holder(s) counterclockwise

and pull out.

11. Turn signal, back-up light, brake light

bulbs: Turn the bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.

12. Parking light bulbs: Pull the bulb straight

out.

13. Insert a new bulb.

14. Place the lamp holder in the groove and

turn clockwise.

15. Press wiring back into place.

16. Align the tail light housing with the holes for

the retaining bolts and press it into place.

17. Tighten the retaining bolts.

18. Reinsert the side and corner panels.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs

228

Rear fog light

G027093

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Carefully insert a small screwdriver (see

illustration above).

3. Pry out the lamp housing.

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and

remove it.

5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.

6. Insert a new bulb and press the lamp hous-

ing back into place.

Door step courtesy lights

G027079

The door step courtesy lights are located under

the dashboard on the driver's and passenger's

sides.

To replace a bulb:

1. Carefully insert a screwdriver and pry out

the lens.

2. Replace the defective bulb.

3. Reinstall the lens.

Cargo compartment light

G027084

1. Carefully insert a screwdriver and pry out

the lens.

2. Pry out the bulb and replace it.

3. Press the lens back into place.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs

229

Vanity mirror lights

G027080

1. Carefully insert a screwdriver and pry out

the lens.

2. Pry out the bulb and replace it.

3. Carefully press the lower edge of lens onto

the four tabs and press the upper edge of

the lens into place.

License plate lights

G030886

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Loosen the screws with a Torx screw-

driver.

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and

pull it out.

4. Pull out the defective bulb and insert a new

one.

5. Reinsert the bulb holder into the housing

and turn it clockwise.

6. Reinstall the housing and screw it into

place.

NOTE

Other bulbs may be difficult for you to

replace yourself. Let a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician replace these

bulbs if necessary.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Replacing fuses

G032337

Relays/fuse box in the engine compart-

ment

Fuse box in the passenger compartment,

behind the plastic cover

Fuse box in the passenger compartment,

on the edge of the dashboard

Fuse box in the cargo compartment

Fuse box in the cargo compartment1.

Additional fuses in cargo compartment

(XC90 Executive*)

If an electrical component fails to function, it is

possible that a fuse has blown.

The fuse boxes are located in four different

places, see the illustration above.

A label on the inside of each cover indicates the

amperage and the electrical components that

are connected to each fuse.

The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to

remove it. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is

difficult to remove, you will find a special fuse

removal tool (and several extra fuses) in the

passenger compartment fuse box on the driv-

er's end of dashboard. From the side, examine

the curved metal wire (see the illustration) to

see if it is broken. If so, put in a new fuse of the

same color and amperage (written on the

fuse). Spare fuses are stored in the fuse box in

the engine compartment and the passenger

compartment. If fuses burn out repeatedly,

have the electrical system inspected by a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

1Certain markets only.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses

231

WARNING

Never use metal objects or fuses with higher

amperage than those stated on the follow-

ing pages. Doing so could seriously damage

or overload the vehicle's electrical system.

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses in the engine compartment

G026972

When replacing fuses, be sure to replace a

blown fuse with a new one of the same color

and amperage (written on the fuse).

No A

1 ABS 30

2 ABS 30

3 Headlight washers 35

4 – 20

5 Auxiliary lights* 35

No A

6 Starter motor relay 25

7 Windshield wipers 15

8 Fuel pump 15

9 Transmission control module

(V8 and 6-cyl.)

10 Ignition coils, engine control

module

11 Throttle pedal sensor, A/C

compressor, e-box fan

No A

12 Engine control module, fuel

injectors, mass airflow sensor

13 Throttle control (V8), Intake

manifold actuator (6-cyl.)

14 Heated oxygen sensor 20

15 Crankcase ventilation, sole-

noid valves, A/C connection,

leakage diagnostics, engine

control module (V8, 6-cyl.),

mass airflow sensor (V8)

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses

233

No A

16 Driver's side low beam head-

light

17 Passenger's side low beam

headlight

18 –

19 Engine control module feed,

engine relay

20 Parking lights 15

21 Vacuum pump 20

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses in the passenger compartment on the edge of the dashboard

G032316

The decal shows the positions and amperage of the fuses

Fuses are located inside the access panel on

the edge of the dashboard, on the driver's side.

There are also a number of spare fuses. When

replacing a blown fuse, be sure to replace it

with a new one of the same color and amper-

age (written on the fuse).

No A

1 Blower – climate system 30

2 Audio amplifier* 30

3 Power driver's seat* 25

No A

4 Power passenger's seat* 25

5 Driver's door – central lock-

ing, power windows, door

mirror

6Front passenger's door – cen-

tral locking, power windows,

door mirror

7 –

No A

8 Radio, CD player, Rear Seat

Entertainment (RSE)*

9 Volvo Navigation System*,

Sirius satellite radio*

10 On-board diagnostics, head-

light switch, steering wheel

angle sensor, steering wheel

module

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235

No A

11 Ignition switch, SRS, engine

control module (V8, 6-cyl.)

immobilizer, transmission

control module (V8, 6-cyl.)

7.5

12 Ceiling lighting, upper elec-

tronic control module

13 Moonroof* 15

14 Bluetooth hands-free system 5

- 15 – 38 -

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuse box in the passenger compartment, behind the plastic cover, driver's side

G028412

This fuse box is located behind the plastic

cover below the steering wheel. When replac-

ing a blown fuse, be sure to replace it with a

new one of the same color and amperage (writ-

ten on the fuse).

No A

1 Heated passenger's seat 15

2 Heated driver's seat 15

3 Horn 15

4 –

No A

5 Audio system 10

6 –

7 –

8 Alarm siren* 5

9 Break light switch feed 5

10 Instrument panel, climate sys-

tem, power driver's seat,

Occupant Weight Sensor

No A

11 12-volt sockets – front and rear

seats, refrigerator* (XC90

Executive)

12 –

13 –

14 –

15 ABS, DSTC 5

16 Power steering, Active Bend-

ing Lights*

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237

No A

17 Driver's side front foglight* 7,5

18 Passenger's side front fog-

light*

7,5

19 –

20 Coolant pump (V8) 5

21 Transmission control module1 10

22 Driver's side high beam1 10

23 Passenger's side high beam 10

24 –

25 –

26 –

27 –

28 Power passenger's seat* 5

29 –

30 Blind Spot Information Sys-

tem*

31 –

32 –

No A

33 Vacuum pump 20

34 Pump – windshield and tail-

gate washers

35 –

36 –

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses

238

Fuses in the cargo compartment

G032342

The fuses in the cargo area are located behind

the panel on the driver's side of the cargo com-

partment. When replacing a blown fuse, be

sure to replace it with a new one of the same

color and amperage (written on the fuse).

No A

1 Backup lights 10

2Parking lights, foglights, cargo

compartment lighting, license

plate lights, brake light diodes

3 Accessories 15

No A

4 –

5 Rear Electronic module 10

6 Rear Seat Entertainment

(accessory)

7,5

7 Rear Seat Entertainment

(accessory)

8 12-volt socket in cargo com-

partment

No A

9 Rear passenger's side door –

power window, power window

cutout function

10 Rear driver's side door – power

window, power window cutout

function

11 –

12 –

13 –

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239

No A

14 Subwoofer*, rear air condition-

ing system *

15 –

16 –

17 Accessory audio 5

18 –

19 Rear window wiper 15

20 Trailer wiring (15-feed)* 20

21 –

22 –

23 Park assist 7,5

24 –

25 –

26 Park assist* 5

27 Main fuse: trailer wiring, park

assist, All Wheel Drive

28 Central locking system 15

29 Driver's side trailer lighting:

parking lights, turn signal*

No A

30 Passenger's side trailer light-

ing: brake light, fog light, turn

signal*

31 Main fuse: fuses 37 and 38 40

32 –

33 –

34 –

35 –

36 –

37 Heated rear window 20

38 Heated rear window 20

09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Additional fuses in the cargo compartment (XC90 Executive*)

G031532

The fuses in the cargo area are located behind

the panel on the driver's side of the cargo com-

partment. When replacing a blown fuse, be

sure to replace it with a new one of the same

color and amperage (written on the fuse).

1. Relays for rear seat

heating and front seat

massage 5 A

2. Rear seat heating, driv-

er's side 15 A

3. Rear seat heating, pas-

senger's side 15 A

4. Front seat ventilation/

massage 10 A

5. - -

6. - -

09 Maintenance and servicing

241

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Audio system overview......................................................................... 244

Audio system controls.......................................................................... 245

Radio functions..................................................................................... 250

Sirius satellite radio............................................................................... 255

Auxiliary equipment............................................................................... 259

CD player/changer................................................................................ 261

Menu structure...................................................................................... 264

Bluetooth® hands-free connection....................................................... 265

Rear Seat Entertainment – Dual Screen (RSE)*.................................... 270

AUDIO

10 Audio

Audio system overview

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CD player

VOLUME – turn to adjust

POWER – On/Off

AM/FM – for switching between FM1,

FM2 and AM

Display

ENTER – select in the menu or activate a

selection

Not in use

MY KEY – programmable key for your

favorite function from the menu

SELECTOR – select sound source

SOUND – make sound settings

EXIT/CLEAR – step back in the menu or

cancel a selection

Not in use

MENU – menu selections/navigation

CD eject

CD slot, CD changer*

search for and store the strongest radio

stations in the area in which you are driving

Station preset buttons/selecct a disc in the

CD changer* (1-6)

IR* Infrared port – for the optional naviga-

tion system remote control

10 Audio

Audio system controls

245

Steering wheel keypad

G027135

The four buttons on the steering wheel keypad

can be used to control the audio system. The

steering wheel keypad can be used to adjust

volume, shift between preset stations and

change CD tracks.

•Press the or buttons briefly to

search for a radio station, or to go to the

next/previous track on a CD.

•Press and hold down these buttons to

search within a track.

Accessing and using menus

G027112

In menu mode, you can change settings and

program new functions in the audio system.

The various menu alternatives are shown in the

display, and the current level in the menu struc-

ture is shown at the upper right corner of the

display.

Press the MENU button to enter menu mode.

Use the menus as follows:

•Use the menu arrow keys (1) to navigate up

or down in the menus. Dots in the display

indicate that there are more menu selec-

tions from which to choose.

•Press ENTER to confirm or cancel a menu

selection.

•One long press on EXIT/CLEAR exits

menu mode.

•A short press on the EXIT/CLEAR enables

you to cancel, undo, or answer no to a

menu selection, or to go back in the menu

structure.

Shortcut

The menu alternatives are numbered and can

be accessed directly by pressing the respec-

tive keys on the numbered keypad on the left

side of the audio panel.

MY KEY – programming a shortcut

Use the MY KEY button to program a favorite

function from the menu, such as RANDOM,

etc.

1. Use the MENU buttons to scroll among the

functions.

2. Select the desired function from the menu

by pressing the MY KEY button for more

than two seconds.

3. When MY KEY STORED is shown in the

display, the function has been stored.

4. Activate the function by briefly pressing the

MY KEY button.

Repeat steps 1 – 4 to store new functions on

the MY KEY buttons.

10 Audio

Audio system controls

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

The MY KEY buttons can only be pro-

grammed for one shortcut function at a

time.

Rear headphone connectors and

controls *

G026982

The door panels behind the second row of

seats can be equipped with headphone con-

nectors for passengers in the second and third

row of seats. Several people can listen to dif-

ferent sound sources, such as CDs or the radio

at the same time without disturbing each other.

Two sets of headphones can be plugged into

each connector.

1. With the audio system switched on, use

the SEL button to select a sound source.

2. Press the arrow keys briefly to change CD

tracks or switch between preset stations.

3. Hold down the arrow keys to fast forward/

reverse, or search for the previous/next

strong radio station.

4. Hold down the SEL button to turn off the

sound.

NOTE

For the best sound reproduction, we rec-

ommend headphones with impedance

between 16 – 32 ohm. The sensitivity of

these should be equal to or greater than

102 dB. The headphone connections are

intended for 3.5 mm contacts and are

located under the lower edge of the socket.

All headphones are automatically turned off

when the ignition is switched off. They must be

manually restarted when the ignition is

switched on again.

Headphones – limitations

•The headphones will only work when the

ignition key is in position I or higher.

•If a set of headphones is connected to the

same source that is being sent through the

speakers, the headphone controls cannot

be used to change track or station. This is

to prevent the driver from being distracted

by an unexpected change in music.

•If the driver selects the same sound source

as someone listening to this source

through headphones, the driver takes con-

trol of the sound source.

•Only one disc in the optional CD changer,

and one track on the CD can be played at

a time.

•Headphone users can choose from among

the preset radio stations (AM, FM1, FM2)

previously set by the driver.

•If FM is played in the speakers, AM is not

available and vice versa.

On/Off button

G027146

10 Audio

Audio system controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247

To activate the system:

1. Turn the ignition key to position I.

NOTE

If you switch off the ignition while the audio

system is on, the system will be on when the

ignition is switched on again.

2. Press the POWER button (3) to switch the

audio system on or off.

Volume control

Turn the knob (2) clockwise or counterclock-

wise to raise or lower the volume. The volume

control is electronic and has no end position.

Volume can also be raised (+) or lowered (–)

using the steering wheel keypad.

Pause mode

If the volume is turned off, the CD player will go

into pause mode. Re-activate the player by

turning up the volume.

Selecting a sound source

•Press AM/FM (4) repeatedly to toggle

between FM1, FM2, and AM

•Press the CD button (1) to change to the

CD player or optional CD changer

•Turn the SELECTOR control (5) to choose

FM1, FM2, AM, CD, CD changer*, AUX*, or

Sirius satellite radio*.

The selected sound source will be shown in the

display.

Sound settings

G027147

1. Press the SOUND button (2) repeatedly

until you come to the setting that you wish

to change. Choose BASS, TREBLE,

FADER, BALANCE, SUBWOOFER*,

CENTER* or SURROUND*.

2. Use the SELECTOR control (1) to adjust

the level of the setting you have selected.

The display shows a scale from min. to

max. position. The center indicates the

normal position.

NOTE

Sound level for the center speaker can only

be set if Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II) or three-

channel stereo (3-CH) is selected in the

menu.

Sound level for the subwoofer can only be set

if SUBWOOFER is selected in the menu (acti-

vated).

Setting Shown in the dis-

play

Bass BASS

Treble TREBLE

Balance between

the right and left

speakers

BALANCE

10 Audio

Audio system controls

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Setting Shown in the dis-

play

Balance between

the front and rear

speakers

FADER

Bass speaker level SUBWOOFER*

Center speaker level CENTER (Premium

Sound system only)

Surround sound

level

SURROUND (Pre-

mium Sound system

only)

SURROUND MODE

Surround sound settings are used to balance

sound levels throughout the vehicle. Surround

settings for the various sound sources are

made separately.

There are three settings for surround sound.

•PRO LOGIC II

•3-CHANNEL

•OFF (2-channel stereo)

The symbol in the display indicates that

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is activated.

•Dolby Surround Pro Logic II functions in

CD mode only.

•2-channel stereo is recommended for AM/

FM radio broadcasts.

•Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is only availa-

ble on the highest level audio system –

Premium Sound.

Use the following instructions to select PRO

LOGIC II, 3-CHANNEL, or to turn these func-

tions off. See also the menu structure on page

264.

1. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and

press ENTER.

2. Select CD SURROUND and press

ENTER.

3. Select PRO LOGIC II, 3-CHANNEL, or

OFF and press ENTER.

4. The symbol PL II is displayed when

Pro Logic II is selected.

5. 3-CH is displayed when 3-channel stereo

is selected.

6. OFF indicates normal stereo mode.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under

license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor-

poration.

"Dolby Surround Pro Logic II", and the double-

D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laborato-

ries Licensing Corporation. Dolby Surround

Pro Logic II is manufactured under licence from

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Bass speaker – SUBWOOFER*

The subwoofer helps the system provide fuller

sound and deeper bass.

1. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and

press ENTER.

2. Select SUBWOOFER and press ENTER.

See page 247 for information on setting the

subwoofer level.

Equalizer FR

EQ – FRONT (certain audio systems)

This function is used to fine-tune the sound

from the front speakers.

1. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and

press ENTER.

2. Select Equalizer FR and press ENTER.

3. Use the menu selection buttons to set the

level or use the SELECTOR control.

4. Press ENTER to select the next frequency.

You can select five frequencies.

5. Press ENTER until you come to the menu

mode to save the changes you have made.

10 Audio

Audio system controls

249

Equalizer RR

EQ – REAR (certain audio systems)

This function is used to fine-tune the sound

from the rear speakers.

1. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and

press ENTER.

2. Select EQ- REAR and press ENTER.

3. Use the menu selection buttons to set the

level or use the SELECTOR control.

4. Press ENTER to select the next frequency.

You can select five frequencies

5. Press ENTER until you come to the menu

mode to save the changes you have made.

Optimal sound reproduction

The audio system is calibrated for optimal

sound reproduction through the use of digital

signal processing. This calibration takes into

account the speakers, amplifier, cabin acous-

tics, the seating position of the listener, etc., for

each combination of vehicle and audio system.

There is also dynamic calibration that takes

into account the setting of the volume control,

radio reception, and the vehicle's speed. The

sound settings described in this manual, such

as BASS, TREBLE, and EQUALIZER are only

intended to enable the user to adapt sound

reproduction to his/her personal preferences.

10 Audio

Radio functions

250

Station search

G027148

1. Choose radio mode AM/FM1/FM2 using

the SELECTOR control (3) or the AM/FM

button (1).

2. Press briefly on or to search

for the next strong station. The radio will

search for the next audible station and then

stop.

3. Press one of the buttons again to start a

new search.

Manually search for a known frequency

1. Press and hold the or button

(or the corresponding buttons on the steer-

ing wheel keypad). MAN will be shown in

the display. The radio will slowly scroll in

the desired direction and then increase

speed after a few seconds.

2. Release the button when the desired fre-

quency is displayed.

3. If you need to adjust the frequency, press

briefly on or .

The manual search function is available for five

seconds after you last pressed the button.

Storing stations

To store a selected station under one of the

station setting buttons 0 – 9 (2):

1. Set the desired station.

2. Press the button under which the station is

to be stored and keep it depressed. The

sound will be interrupted for several sec-

onds and STATION STORED is shown in

the display. The station is now stored.

You can store up to 10 stations each for AM,

FM1 and FM2, i.e. a total of 30 stations.

Frequency ranges

Radio Frequency band

FM 87.7 – 107.9 MHz

AM 530 – 1710 kHz

Automatically storing stations –

AUTOSTORE

G027149

This function automatically searches for, and

stores up to 10 strong AM or FM stations in a

separate memory. If more than 10 stations are

found, the 10 strongest ones will be stored. The

function is especially useful in areas in which

you are not acquainted with radio stations or

their frequencies.

Starting autostore

1. Choose a frequency band with the AM/

FM button.

2. Press and hold down the AUTO button (1)

until AUTOSTORING is shown in the dis-

play.

10 Audio

Radio functions

251

When AUTOSTORING is no longer displayed,

the autostore process is complete. The auto-

matically stored stations can be selected withe

the preset (number) keys If there are no stations

with sufficient signal strength, NO AST

FOUND is displayed.

Stopping autostore

Press EXIT.

Selecting an autostored station

1. Press AUTO (1) briefly. AUTO will be dis-

played.

2. Press one of the preset buttons (0 – 9).

The radio will remain in Autostore mode until

AUTO, EXIT, or AM/FM is pressed.

SCAN

This function automatically searches the cur-

rently selected waveband (AM, FM1, or FM2)

for strong stations. When the radio finds a sta-

tion, it will pause for approximately 8 seconds,

after which it will continue scanning.

Activating/deactivating Scan

1. Choose a waveband by pressing the AM/

FM button.

2. Press SCAN (2). SCAN will be shown in the

display.

3. Press EXIT to stop scanning.

Storing a station found by SCAN

Stations can be stored on the preset buttons

while the SCAN function is activated.

•Press a preset button and hold it down until

Station stored is displayed.

This deactivates SCAN and the stored station

can be selected by pressing the preset button.

Radio text

Certain stations broadcast program informa-

tion, which can be shown in the display.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select RADIOTEXT in the menu and press

ENTER.

Select RADIOTEXT again to deactivate.

HD Radio൅

൅

reception (U.S.

models only)1

Introduction

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio

broadcast

HD radio is a brand name registered by the

Ibiquity digital corporation2. They are the

developer of a broadcasting technology called

IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to

the method of transmitting a digital radio

broadcast signal centered on the same fre-

1HD Radio(TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity

Digital Corp. HD Radio(TM) is only available in vehicles not equipped with the optional integrated CD changer.

2HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity

Digital Corp.

10 Audio

Radio functions

252

quency as the AM or FM station's present fre-

quency.

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"

since it is both analogue and digital. During

hybrid operation, receivers still continue to

receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD

radio receivers incorporate both modes of

reception, where the receiver will automatically

switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal

cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.

When you have tuned to an HD Radio station,

the symbol will appear in the audio sys-

tem display.

More information about HD radio and IBOC

can be found on Ibiquity's website,

www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.

Benefits of digital broadcasting

•Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality

and AM as analogue FM).

•Some FM frequencies offer a greater num-

ber of listening choices through “multicast-

ing” (consisting of a frequency's main

channel and any sub-channels that may

also be available on that particular fre-

quency. See also the section "Sub-chan-

nels" below).

•When receiving a digital signal there is no

multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/

crackling due to outside influences.

How HD broadcasting works

HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio

and broadcasts of this type are available in

many areas of the United States. However,

there are a few key differences:

•Instead of transmitting one analogue sig-

nal, stations send out a bundled signal –

both analogue and digital.

•An HD radio receiver can receive both dig-

ital and analogue broadcasts. Depending

on the terrain and location of the vehicle

(which will influence the signal strength),

the receiver will determine which signal to

receive.

Limitations

•Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM

only): The main channel is the only channel

that can receive in hybrid mode (both dig-

ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub-

channels, they are broadcast in digital

mode only. The main FM channel will be

displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC

(Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate there

are sub-channels available) The sub-FM

channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2

WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.

•Reception coverage area: Due to current

IBOC transmitter power limitations, the

reception coverage area in digital mode is

somewhat more limited than the station's

analogue coverage area. Please be aware

that as with any radio broadcast technol-

ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level and

building location can have positive or neg-

ative effects on radio reception.

•Analogue to digital/digital to analogue

blending: Analogue to digital blending will

occur as the signal strength reaches a pre-

set threshold in the receiver. This will be

noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak

reception) and is normal.

NOTE

There may be a noticeable difference in

sound quality when a change from analogue

to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such

as:

•Volume increase or decrease

•Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/

Treble cut or boost

•Time alignment (Digital program mate-

rial in extreme cases can be as much as

8 seconds behind the analogue). This

will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.

The above items are dependant on the

broadcaster's equipment settings and do

not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio

receiver or antenna systems.

10 Audio

Radio functions

253

Switching HD on or off

The factory setting for HD radio is on. However,

when driving through areas with weak HD sig-

nals (fringe areas), you may experience that the

radio repeatedly switches between analogue/

digital and digital/analogue reception. If this

happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off.

To do so:

1. Be sure the audio system is switched on

and in AM or FM mode.

2. Press MENU in the center console control

panel.

3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will dis-

appear from the box on the display screen).

This will disable the radio's capability to receive

digital broadcasts but it will continue to func-

tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM

receiver. Please note that when HD is switched

off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan-

nels (see the following section for a more

detailed explanation of sub-channels).

Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD

(an X will appear in the box on the display

screen).

Sub-channels

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM

wavebands only) will also have sub-channels

offering additional types of programming or

music.

In such cases, a number will be displayed to

the right of the frequency number indicating

that the currently tuned frequency has at least

one sub-channel. The "2" in the illustration indi-

cates that you are currently listening to the first

sub-channel on frequency 93.9.

Selecting sub-channels

To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press

the right arrow key on the center console or on

the steering wheel keypad. To go back to the

main channel, press the left arrow key. To go

to subchannel 2 (if available), press the right

arrow key.

If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main

channel, pressing the left arrow key will tune to

the next lower radio frequency.

NOTE

•When the radio has gone into HD mode,

it may take several seconds before the

">" symbol (if the current frequency has

any sub-channels) is displayed to the

right of the frequency. Pressing the

arrow keys before the number is dis-

played will cause the radio to tune to the

next available radio station, not to the

current station's sub-channels.

•When you are no longer in broadcasting

range of the currently tuned sub-chan-

nel, No HD reception will be dis-

played. The radio will then be muted

and it will be necessary to tune to or

search for a new radio station.

Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,

see page 250 for information on storing sta-

tions.

If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it

may take up to 6 seconds before the channel

becomes audible. If you press this button while

10 Audio

Radio functions

254

you are out of digital range of the transmitter,

No HD reception will be displayed.

10 Audio

Sirius satellite radio

255

Listening to satellite radio

The Sirius satellite system consists of a number

of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous

orbit.

NOTE

•The digital signals from the Sirius satel-

lites are line-of-sight, which means that

physical obstructions such as bridges,

tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere

with signal reception.

•Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-

lic objects transported on roof racks or

in a ski box, or other antennas that may

impede signals from the SIRIUS satel-

lites.

Selecting Sirius radio mode

1. Press Power to switch on the audio sys-

tem (see page 244 for information on the

standard radio functions).

2. Turn the SELECTOR dial until Sirius 1 or 2

is displayed.

Activating Sirius radio

1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no

audio, which means that the channel is

unsubscribed and the text "Call 888-539-

SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is displayed

(see also "Selecting a channel" in the right

column).

2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).

3. When asked for the Sirius ID number press

AUTO to display this number. It is also

possible to retrieve the Sirius ID from the

MENU.

4. "UPDATING SUBSCRIPTION" will be

displayed while the subscription is being

updated, after which the display will return

to the normal view.

SIRUS ID

The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting the

Sirius Call Center. It is used to activate your

account and when making any account trans-

actions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referred

to as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN).

This function displays the 12-digit SIRIUS ID.

Selecting a channel category

1. Select Sirius radio mode as described

above.

2. Press ENTER.

3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll

through the list of categories.

4. Press ENTER to select a category.

5. Use the and buttons to select

a channel in the currently chosen category.

NOTE

The category "All" is default, which enables

you to scroll through the entire list of avail-

able satellite channels.

The channel categories are automatically

updated several times a year. This takes

approximately two minutes and will inter-

rupt normal broadcasting. A message will

be displayed while updating is in progress.

Information on channel or feature updates is

available at www.sirius.com.

Selecting a channel

There are two ways of tuning in a channel:

•By pressing and holding the and

buttons to start the scroll function.

The scrolling function begins slowly and

increases speed after approximately

5 seconds. Release the button to listen to

the currently displayed channel.

•Through direct channel entry

Direct channel entry

The Sirius satellite channels are numbered

consecutively throughout all of the categories.

To access a channel directly:

10 Audio

Sirius satellite radio

256

1. Press MENU and scroll to Direct channel

entry.

2. Use the numerical keypad to enter the

channel's number. Press EXIT if necessary

to erase a digit.

3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to this

channel, even if it belongs to a category

other than the currently selected one.

NOTE

The numbers of skipped or locked channels

will not be displayed.

•If a channel is locked, the access code

must be entered before the channel can

be selected. See "Unlocking a channel"

on page 257.

Scanning

SCAN automatically searches through the list

of satellite channels. see page 250 for more

detailed information.

Storing a channel

A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;

10 channels each for Sirius 1 and 2. See page

250 for detailed information on storing chan-

nels.

•A long press on one of the number keys

stores the currently tuned channel on that

key.

•A short press on a number key while the

radio is in Sirius 1 or 2 mode will tune to the

preset satellite channel stored on that but-

ton, regardless of the currently selected

channel category.

Song Seek and Song Memory

The Song Seek and Song Memory functions

provide both audio and visual notification when

Sirius is broadcasting your favorite songs.

Song Seek enables you to store the name of

the song for future advance notification when

that song is being played. The Song Memory

feature makes it possible to view all of the cur-

rent songs that are stored in memory.

Song memory

Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's

memory.

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to "Add song to song mem." and

follow the instructions shown in the dis-

play.

If a new song is selected when the memory is

full, you will be prompted to press ENTER to

delete the last song on the list.

The remaining songs in the list will move down

one position, and the newly added song will be

placed at the top of the list.

Song seek

When a satellite radio channel plays one of the

songs stored in the song memory, the listener

will be alerted by a text message and an audi-

ble signal.

Press ENTER to listen to the song or EXIT to

cancel.

To activate/deactivate the song seek function:

1. Press MENU

2. Scroll to "Song seek"

3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate the

function.

NOTE

When the song has ended, the radio will

remain tuned to the channel on which the

song was played.

10 Audio

Sirius satellite radio

257

Radio text

The text that is displayed about the song cur-

rently playing can be changed. Use the AUTO

button to switch between Artist, Title, Com-

poser, or to switch radio text off, or use the

menu to display and select among these cate-

gories.

Advanced settings

This menu function enables you to make set-

tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions.

To access this menu:

1. Press MENU.

2. Select Adv. settings.

WARNING

Settings should be made when the vehicle

is at a standstill.

The following settings can be made in the Sir-

ius menu.

•Songs can be added to the song list

•Channel skip settings can be made

•Channel lock settings can be made

•The channel access code can be displayed

or changed

•Your Sirius ID can be displayed

Skip options

This function is used to remove a channel from

the list of available channels.

Skip current channel

1. Select CHANNEL SKIP LIST and press

ENTER.

2. Select a category in the list and press

ENTER.

3. Skip channels in the list presented by

pressing ENTER.

Unskip all channels

This permanently removes all channels from

the skip list and makes them available for

selection.

Temp. unskip all ch.

This function will temporarily unskip all chan-

nels and make them available for selection. The

channels remain on the skip list and will again

be skipped the next time the ignition is

switched on.

Channel lock

Access to specific channels can be restricted

(locked). A locked channel will not provide

audio, song titles, or artist information.

NOTE

All channels are initially unlocked at deliv-

ery.

Locking a channel:

1. Select "Adv. settings" in the menu and

select LOCK OPTIONS and press

ENTER.

2. Select CHANNEL LOCK LIST and press

ENTER

3. Enter the channel access code1 and press

ENTER.

4. Select a category in the list and press

ENTER.

5. Lock channels in the list presented by

pressing ENTER.

The channel is now locked and a checked box

will be displayed to indicate this. It will be nec-

essary to enter the channel access code. See

the section "Unlocking a channel" in order to

listen to a locked channel.

Unlocking a channel

A channel's access code1 is required to unlock

a channel.

1The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

10 Audio

Sirius satellite radio

258

Unlock all channels

This permanently removes all channels from

the locked list and makes them available for

selection.

Temp. unlock all ch.

This function will temporarily unlock all chan-

nels and make them available for selection. The

channels remain on the locked list and will

again be locked the next time the ignition is

switched on.

CHANGE CODE

This function makes it possible to change the

channel access code. The default code is

0000.

To change the code:

1. Select CHANGE CODE and press

ENTER.

2. Enter the current code and press ENTER.

3. Enter the new code and press ENTER.

4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER.

If an incorrect code is entered, the

text "Incorrect code!" is displayed.

If you have forgotten the access code

1. Select "SIRIUS ID" in the Sirius settings

menu and press ENTER.

2. Press and hold the ENTER button for

2 seconds.

The current code will be displayed.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with

assistance.

10 Audio

Auxiliary equipment

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259

G027029

Auxiliary connector

AUX*

The AUX (auxiliary) port can be used to con-

nect a device such as an MP3 player.

Turn the SELECTOR control (see the illustra-

tion on page 244) to choose AUX.

If the player is being charged through a 12-volt

socket while it is connect to the AUX port,

sound quality may be impaired.

The volume of the external sound source AUX

may be different from the volume of the internal

sound sources such as the CD player or the

radio.

USB

USB connector in glove compartment

If you connect an iPod, MP3 player or a USB

flash drive to the optional USB connector, this

device can be controlled using the vehicle's

audio controls.

NOTE

Be sure that the device and/or cable are in

the glove compartment before closing the

glove compartment door.

1. Select USB with the SELECTOR button.

>Connect device will be displayed.

2. Connect the iPod, MP3 player or USB

flash drive to the USB connector (see the

illustration).

>The text Loading will be displayed while

the system loads the files (folder struc-

ture) on the device. This may take a

short time.

When the information has been loaded, infor-

mation about the tracks on the device will be

displayed.

The / buttons can be used to fast

forward/reverse or change tracks:

•Press briefly to change tracks.

•Press slightly longer to fast forward/

reverse.

The arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad

can also be used in the same way.

NOTE

The system supports playback of files in the

most common versions of formats such as

mp3, wma, and wav. However, there may be

versions of these formats that the system

does not support.

The system also supports a number of

iPod models produced in 2005 or later.

10 Audio

Auxiliary equipment

260

USB flash drive

To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is

advisable to only store music files on the drive.

It will take considerably longer for the system

to index the files on the drive if it contains any-

thing other than compatible music files.

NOTE

•The system supports removable media

that uses the USB 2.0 standard and the

FAT32 file system and can index up to

500 folders and a maximum of 64,000

files. The device must have at least 256

Mb of memory.

•When using a longer type of USB flash

drive, connecting it with a USB adapter

cable will help reduce mechanical wear

on the USB socket and the USB flash

drive.

Auxiliary sound level

G027150

If the external sound source's volume is too

high, the quality of the sound may be impaired.

This can be prevented by adjusting the external

sound source's input volume.

1. While playing the radio or a CD, lower the

audio volume to about one-quarter.

2. Switch to AUX mode on the audio system.

3. Connect the headphone output from your

music player to the AUX input using a cable

with a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug at both

ends.

4. Set your music player's headphone vol-

ume to three-quarters using the player's

volume controls.

5. Select AUX VOLUME in the menu and

press ENTER.

6. Adjust the volume with SELECTOR (1) or

with the up/down arrows (2) and press

ENTER.

7. If there is distortion, lower your music play-

er's headphone volume until the distortion

goes away.

Finally, exit the menu and adjust the audio vol-

ume to a comfortable level.

NOTE

This cannot be done with the steering wheel

keypad.

The cover over the cup holders should be

open when an auxiliary device is connected.

10 Audio

CD player/changer

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261

G027151

Playing a CD

CD player

If a CD is in the slot and the audio system is in

CD mode when it is switched on, the CD will be

played automatically. Otherwise, to play a CD:

1. Insert a CD into the slot (2).

2. Select the CD mode using the

SELECTOR control (4) or the CD button

(1).

CD changer*

The CD changer can hold up to six discs.

If a CD position in the changer containing a disc

is selected, and the audio system is in CD

mode when it is switched on, the CD will play

automatically. Otherwise, to play a CD:

1. Select an empty position using the station

setting buttons 1 – 6. INSERT DISC will be

displayed. Be sure this text is displayed

before inserting a disc. The numbers of

positions already containing discs are

shown in the display.

2. Insert a CD into the slot (2).

3. Select the CD mode using the

SELECTOR control (4) or the CD button

(1).

Ejecting CDs

CD player

Press the EJECT button (3) to eject the CD.

CD changer

Ejecting one disc

A short press on the EJECT button (3) will

eject the CD that is currently playing.

NOTE

For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected CD

must be removed within 12 seconds or it will

be automatically drawn back into the slot

and the CD player will enter pause mode.

Press the CD button to restart the disc.

Ejecting all discs

A long press on the EJECT button (3) starts

the EJECT ALL function.

The text EJECTING ALL will be displayed and

the entire magazine will be emptied disc by

disc.

Pause

To pause CD playback, turn the volume all the

way down. "CD paused" will be displayed.

This will not occur if someone in the rear seat

is listening to the CD through the optional

headphones.

Play will resume when the volume is turned up

again.

Audio files

In addition to playing normal music CDs, the

CD player/changer can also play discs con-

taining files in mp3 or wma format.

NOTE

Certain discs that are copy protected can-

not be read by the player.

When a disc with audio files is inserted in the

player, the player scans the disc's folders

before it begins playing the files. The length of

time that this takes depends on the quality of

the disc.

10 Audio

CD player/changer

262

Navigating the disc and playing tracks

If a disc with audio files is in the CD player,

press ENTER to display a list of folders on the

disc.

Use the up and down arrows to move among

the folders on the disc. Audio files have the

symbol and folders containing these

files have the symbol.

Press ENTER to play a selected folder or a file.

When the music file has been played, the

player will continue to play the rest of the files

in the current folder. When all of the files in the

folder have been played, the player will auto-

matically go to the next folder and play the files

in it.

NOTE

Press or if the entire name of

the current track does not fit in the display.

Changing tracks

CD player/CD changer

1. Briefly press or to go to the

next/previous track or file. The steering

wheel keypad can be used in the same

way.

2. Press and hold down or to

search within a track/file. The search con-

tinues as long as the buttons are

depressed. The steering wheel keypad can

be used in the same way.

SCAN

This function plays the first ten seconds of

each track or file1.

1. Press SCAN to begin scanning the tracks

or files on the currently selected CD.

2. Press EXIT/CLEAR or SCAN to interrupt

the scan function and listen to an entire

track or file.

Random play

CD player

This function plays the tracks or files on a CD

in random order (shuffle).

If a normal music CD is being played

Select RANDOM in the menu and press

ENTER.

If a CD with mp3 or wma files is being

played

Select DISC or FOLDER in the menu and

press ENTER.

CD changer

This function offers two alternatives for playing

the tracks on the disc(s) in the CD changer in

random order (shuffle).

•SINGLE DISC (random order on the cur-

rently selected disc)

•ALL DISCS (random order on all of the

CDs in the changer)

If a normal music CD is being played

•Select RANDOM in the menu and press

ENTER.

•Select SINGLE DISC or ALL DISCS and

press ENTER.

NOTE

Press to play the next randomly selected

track. This can only be done on the currently

selected disc.

If a CD with mp3 or wma files is being

played

Select SINGLE DISC or FOLDER In the menu

and press ENTER.

This function is deactivated when a new disc is

selected.

1CD changer: SCAN only functions on the currently selected disc.

10 Audio

CD player/changer

263

Disctext

Certain CDs contain information about the

disc, such as the titles of the tracks, etc. This

information can be shown in the display by

activating the DISCTEXT function.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select DISCTEXT in the menu and press

ENTER.

3. Any information that may be stored on the

disc will be displayed.

To deactivate this function, select DISCTEXT

and press ENTER.

Compact disc care

•Do not put tape or labels on the disc itself.

They could become stuck in the player.

•Use CD standard EN 60908 discs only.

Discs not meeting this standard may cause

problems with system (poor sound). CDR

discs can cause listening problems due to

the quality of the disc or recording equip-

ment used.

•DualDisc: The audio side of a DualDisc

(combined CD/DVD) does not meet CD

specifications and may not play in your

audio system.

•Keep the discs clean. Wipe them with a

soft, clean, lint-free cloth, working from the

center outwards. If necessary, dampen the

cloth with a neutral soap solution. Dry thor-

oughly before using.

•Never use cleaning spray or antistatic liq-

uid. Use only cleaners specifically made for

CD's.

•Use discs of the correct size only (3.5"

discs should never be used).

•Volvo does not recommend the use of

plastic outer rings on the disc.

•Condensation may occur on discs/optical

components of the changer in cold winter

weather. The disc can be dried with a

clean, lint-free cloth. Optical components

in the CD changer may, however, take up

to one hour to dry off.

•Never attempt to play a disc which is dam-

aged in any way.

•When not in use, the discs should be

stored in their covers. Avoid storing discs

in excessive heat, direct sunlight or dusty

locations.

10 Audio

Menu structure

264

FM Menu

1. Radio Text

2. Audio Settings1

1. Surround

2. Subwoofer (option)

3. Equalizer Fr

4. Equalizer Rr

5. Reset All

AM Menu

See Audio Settings i the FM Menu.

CD Menu

1. Random

2. Disc Text

3. Audio Settings

See Audio Settings in the FM Menu.

AUX Menu (option)

1. AUX input vol

2. Audio Settings

See Audio Settings in the FM Menu

1Certain audio systems

10 Audio

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

265

Introduction

System overview

Cell phone

Location of the microphone

Center console control panel and display

Bluetooth

hands-free

This feature makes it possible to set up a wire-

less connection between a Bluetooth-ena-

bled cell phone and the vehicle’s audio system.

This enables the audio system to function as a

hands-free connection and allows you to

remote-control a number of the phone’s func-

tions. The microphone used by this system is

located in the roof lining near the sun visor (2).

The buttons and other controls on the cell

phone can always be used regardless of

whether or not the phone is connected to the

hands-free system.

NOTE

Not all cell phones are fully compatible with

the hands-free system. A list of compatible

phones is available at your Volvo retailer or

at www.volvocars.us

WARNING

Never use the hands-free feature or any

other device in your vehicle in a way that

distracts you from the task of driving safely.

Distraction can lead to a serious accident.

Overview of Bluetooth® controls

Center console control panel

VOLUME: the buttons on the steering

wheel keypad can be also be used.

Display

ENTER: press to answer an incoming call,

make menu selections or activate the

phone from standby mode.

PHONE: press to turn standby on/off.

EXIT: press to end a call, reject an incom-

ing call, go back in the menu system, can-

cel a selection or to erase numbers/letters

that have been entered.

10 Audio

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

266

MENU: press to access the menu system.

Press the arrow keys to go up or down

among menu alternatives.

Search: go forward or back when entering

text/numbers.

Alphanumeric keys and menu shortcuts.

Getting started

Use the controls in the center console (3) or the

buttons in the steering wheel keypad to

access, navigate and make selections in the

hands-free system’s menus (see page 269).

Activating/deactivating

A short press on the PHONE button in the cen-

ter console activates the hands-free system.

The text PHONE will appear at the top of the

display to indicate that the audio system is in

telephone mode.

The symbol indicates that the hands-free

system is active.

A long press on the PHONE button deactivates

the hands-free system and disconnects the

cell phone.

Connecting cell phones

The procedure for connecting a cell phone var-

ies, depending on the phone itself, and on

whether or not the phone has been previously

connected.

If this is the first time the phone is to be con-

nected to the hands-free system, proceed as

follows:

Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus

1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth® func-

tion (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual if

necessary) or go to www.volvocars.com

2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth® hands-

free system by briefly pressing the

PHONE button.

>Add phone will be displayed. If one or

more cell phones are already registered

in the system, they will also be dis-

played.

3. Select Add phone.

> The audio system will search for cell

phones that are in range. This search

takes approximately 30 seconds. Any

phones detected will be displayed with

their Bluetooth® names. The hands-free

system’s Bluetooth® name will appear

in the cell phone’s display as My Car.

4. Select one of the cell phones shown in the

audio system’s (center console) display.

5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the

digits shown in the audio system’s display.

Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus

1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly

pressing the PHONE button in the center

console. If there is a cell phone connected,

disconnect it from the hands-free system.

2. Perform a search using the cell phone’s

Bluetooth® function (consult the cell

phone’s owner’s manual if necessary).

3. Select My Car in the list of devices shown

in the cell phone’s display.

4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234

in the cell phone.

5. Connect to My Car from the cell phone.

The cell phone will be registered and will be

connected automatically to the audio system

while the text Synchronizing is displayed. For

more information on synchronizing a cell

phone, see page 268.

When a connection has been established, the

symbol and the cell phone’s Bluetooth®

name will be displayed. The cell phone can

now be controlled from the audio system.

Making a call

1. Ensure that PHONE is shown at the top of

the center console display and that the

symbol is visible (by pressing briefly on

PHONE on the center console).

10 Audio

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

267

2. Dial the desired phone number or use the

phone book (see page 268).

3. Press ENTER.

End the call by pressing EXIT.

Disconnecting the cell phone

The cell phone is automatically disconnected

from the audio system if it is moved out of

range. For more information about connec-

tions, see page 266.

The cell phone can be manually disconnected

from the hands-free system by pressing

PHONE. The hands-free system is also deac-

tivated when the ignition is switched off (or if

the driver’s door is opened on vehicles equip-

ped with the optional keyless drive).

When the cell phone is disconnected from the

hands-free system, a call in progress can be

continued using the cell phone’s own speaker

and microphone.

NOTE

Certain cell phones may require confirma-

tion from the phone’s keypad when a call is

transferred from hands-free to the cell

phone.

Handling calls

Incoming calls

Press ENTER to answer a call, even if the

audio system is currently in e.g., CD or FM

mode.

Press EXIT to reject a call.

Automatic answer

This function means that incoming calls will be

answered automatically. Activate or deactivate

the function in the menu system underPhone

menu Call options Auto. answer.

Call settings

While a call is in progress, press MENU or

ENTER on the center console to access the

following functions:

•Mute microphone: mute the audio sys-

tem’s microphone.

•Transf call to cell: transfer the call from

hands-free to the cell phone.

•Phone book: this feature enables you to

search for a stored telephone number.

NOTE

•On certain cell phones, the connection

is broken when the mute function is

used, which is normal. If this happens,

the hands-free system will prompt you

to reconnect.

•A new call cannot be initiated while

another call is in progress.

Sound settings

Call volume

Call volume can be adjusted while a call is in

progress using the buttons in the steering

wheel keypad.

Audio system volume

When PHONE is displayed, volume for the

audio system can be adjusted in the normal

way with the audio system's VOLUME control.

In order to adjust volume during a phone call,

the audio system must be switched to one of

the other modes (FM, CD, etc).

Audio system sound can be automatically

muted when a phone call is received in

Phone Menu… Phone settings…

Sounds and volume… Mute radio and

adjust the volume with the / keys on the

center console.

10 Audio

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

268

Ringing volume

Go to Phone Menu… Phone settings…

Sounds and volume… Ring volume

and adjust the volume with the / keys on

the center console.

Ringing tones

The hands-free system’s integrated ringing

tones can be selected in Phone Menu…

Phone settings… Sounds and volume…

Ring signals… Ring signal 1, etc.

NOTE

The connected cell phone’s ring tone is not

switched off when one of the hands-free

system's ringing tones is used.

If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s

ring tone1, go to Phone Menu… Phone

settings… Sounds and volume… Ring

signals… Use cell phone signal

More information about registering

and connecting cell phones

A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registered

in the hands-free system. Registration only

needs to be done once for each phone. After

registration, the cell phones can then be found

in the list of registered phones. Only one cell

phone can be connected to hands-free at a

time. Phones can be unregistered in Phone

Menu… Bluetooth… Remove phone

Automatic connection

When the hands-free system is active and the

most recently connected cell phone is within

range, it is detected automatically. When the

audio system searches for the most recently

connected phone, this phone’s name appears

in the display. To manually connect a different

cell phone, press EXIT.

Manual connection

To connect a phone other than the one that

was most recently connected or to switch

between cell phones that are already regis-

tered in the hands-free system:

Put the audio system in telephone mode and

follow the instructions in the display or change

the connected cell by going into the menu sys-

tem under Phone Menu… Bluetooth…

Connect phone or Change phone.

Phone book

In order to use the hands-free system’s phone

book (list of contacts), PHONE must be dis-

played at the top of the center console display

and the symbol must be visible.

The audio system stores a copy of the phone

book of each registered cell phone. The phone

book is automatically copied each time a

phone is connected. This function can be acti-

vated in Phone settings… Sync ph book.

Searches for contacts are only made in the

phone book of the currently connected cell

phone.

NOTE

If a particular cell phone does not support

copying of the phone book, List is empty

will be displayed when copying has been

completed.

If the phone book contains information about

someone who is trying to call you, this infor-

mation will be shown in the display.

Searching for contacts

The easiest way to search for a contact in the

phone book is to press and hold any of the

buttons 2–9 in the center console (no. 8 in the

1Not supported by all cell phones.

10 Audio

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

269

illustration on 265. This starts a search based

on the first letter on the button that has been

pressed.

The phone book can also be accessed by

pressing the navigation buttons / on the

center console or by pressing / on

the steering wheel keypad. A search can also

be made in the phone book’s search menu in

Phone book… Search:

1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s name

and press ENTER or simply press ENTER.

2. Select the desired contact and press

ENTER to make a call to that person.

Voice mail number

The phone number to your voice mail can be

changed in the menu Phone settings…

Call options… Voice mail no.. If no number

has been stored, this menu can be accessed

by a prolonged press on button 1. Once a

phone number has been stored, press and

hold 1 to dial this number.

Call lists

Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are cop-

ied to the hands-free system each time that

phone is connected. These lists are then upda-

ted while the phone is connected. Press

ENTER to show the most recently dialed num-

bers. Other call lists can be found under Call

NOTE

Certain cell phones display the list of the

most recently dialed numbers in reverse

order.

Entering text

Text is entered by using the number buttons in

the center console. Press a button once to

enter the first letter on the button, twice to enter

the second letter, etc. Continue to press the

button to display other characters.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Press

and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that

have been entered. Use the / buttons on

the center console to navigate among the char-

acters.

Bluetooth® menus

1. Call register…

1.1. Last 10 missed calls

1.2. Last 10 received calls

1.3. Last 10 dialed calls

2. Call register…

2.1. Search

2.2. Copy fr. cell phone

3. Bluetooth…

3.1. Change phone

3.2. Remove phone

3.3. Connect fr. cell phone

3.4. Car Bluetooth info

4. Call options…

4.1. Automatic answer

4.2. Voice mail number

5. Phone settings…

5.1. Sounds and volume…

5.1.1. Ring volume

5.1.2. Ring signals…

5.1.3. Mute radio

5.2. Synchronize phone book

10 Audio

Rear Seat Entertainment – Dual Screen (RSE)*

270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The RSE system can be used at the same time

as the vehicle’s audio system.

When the rear seat passengers play a DVD,

connect an external device to the RSE AUX

connectors, etc., and listen to the audio

through the cordless headphones, the driver

and front seat passenger can still use the vehi-

cle's audio system to listen to the radio, a CD,

music stored on an MP3 player, etc.

Please also refer to the Quick Guide provided

with the RSE system for additional information.

Electrical current - ignition key

The RSE system can be activated with the igni-

tion in position I or II (see page 141 for infor-

mation on the ignition positions), or when the

engine is running. While the engine is being

started, a film or music that is currently being

played will pause momentarily and resume

playing when the engine has started.

When the RSE system has been used once

when the ignition is switched off, it will be then

be blocked for further use. RSE can be restar-

ted by turning the ignition key to position I.

NOTE

Using RSE for more than approximately

10 minutes with the engine switched off may

drain the vehicle’s battery and make it diffi-

cult or impossible to start the engine.

If this occurs, a message will be displayed

on the RSE system’s screens.

Music

Listening to a music CD

1. Insert a CD into the RSE player’s slot with

the disc’s label facing upward.

> The CD will begin to play automatically.

2. Switch on the cordless headphones and

select CH A for the left screen or CH B for

the right screen.

> This will direct the sound to the head-

phones.

3. Adjust the headphone volume by using the

thumb wheel on the headphones.

To listen through the vehicle’s audio sys-

tem speakers, press MODE on the audio

system control panel and select AUX.

Press on the RSE remote to route the

sound through the speakers.

Selecting a folder on the CD

1. Insert the CD in the player.

2. Press .

3. Use the navigation buttons (the arrow keys

surrounding the OK button on the RSE

remote control) to highlight a folder and/or

a specific track.

4. Press to select a sub-folder.

Playback alternatives

The CD can be played in several different ways.

Use the navigation buttons to select one of the

alternatives.

With the dialogue box displayed:

1. Press the right navigation button to access

the menu to the right..

2. Use the navigation keys to select one of the

alternatives.

3. Confirm your choice by pressing .

Changing tracks on the CD

Change tracks on the CD by pressing

or . Hold the respective buttons

down for fast forward or reverse.

Pause

1. Pause and restart the CD by pressing

2. Stop the CD by pressing .

3. Press again to eject the CD.

10 Audio

Rear Seat Entertainment – Dual Screen (RSE)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271

Home-burned CDs

CDs burned on a home computer can be

played. However, the quality of the sound may

be affected by the type of source file and for-

mat used, and by the condition of the disc.

RSE-AUX connectors and 12-volt

socket

The three color-coded (yellow-white-red) RSE-

AUX connectors can be used to connect an

auxiliary device to the RSE system. Always fol-

low the connection instructions provided with

the auxiliary device. Devices connected to

RSE-AUX can use the RSE screens, cordless

headphones, the headphone sockets or the

vehicle’s audio system speakers.

Connecting a device to RSE-AUX

G015700

RSE-AUX connectors are located on the rear side

of the tunnel console

1. Connect the video cable from the auxiliary

device to the yellow connector.

2. Connect the left audio cable to the white

connector and the right cable to the red

connector.

3. Connect the power cable to the 12-volt

socket (if the device is designed for 12-volt

current).

For the location of the 12-volt sockets, see

page 79.

System

The formats supported by the system are:

Audio

format

CD-DA, DVD Audio Playback,

MP3, WMA

Video

format

DVD video, VCD, SVCD, Divx/

MPEG-4, WMA video, Photo cd

Kodak, Photo CD JPG

Disc

format

DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RW,

DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, CD-R,

CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-3, HDCD

Advanced system settings

These settings can only be made when there is

no disc in the CD/DVD player.

Press MEDIA MENU.

GENERAL SETUP ANGLE MARK

CAPTION

AUDIO SETUP COMPRESSION

DVX(R)

REGISTRATION

PREFERENCES TV TYPE

AUDIO

SUBTITLE

DEFAULTS

10 Audio

Rear Seat Entertainment – Dual Screen (RSE)*

272 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Replacing batteries in the remote

control and cordless headphones

The remote control and headphones each run

on 2 AAA batteries.

G031359

Remote control

1. Remove the retaining screw and lift off the

battery cover.

2. Remove the old batteries and insert new

ones as indicated by the symbols in the

battery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover and tighten the

retaining screw.

G030395

Cordless headphones

1. Remove the retaining screw and lift off the

battery cover.

2. Remove the old batteries and insert new

ones as indicated by the symbols in the

battery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover and tighten the

retaining screw.

NOTE

If the temperature in the passenger com-

partment is high (e.g., if the car has been

parked in the sun for a prolonged period) or

if the batteries in the remote or headphones

are weak, a message will appear on the RSE

screens.

Concern for the environment

Used batteries should be disposed of properly

(e.g., at a recycling facility, etc).

10 Audio

273

274

Label information.................................................................................. 276

Dimensions .......................................................................................... 278

Weights ................................................................................................ 280

Fluids..................................................................................................... 282

Suspension........................................................................................... 284

Engine oil............................................................................................... 285

Engine specifications............................................................................ 286

Electrical system................................................................................... 287

Three-way catalytic converter............................................................... 289

Overview of information and warning symbols .................................... 290

Volvo programs..................................................................................... 292

SPECIFICATIONS

11 Specifications

Label information

276

11 Specifications

Label information

277

Model plate: includes e.g., Vehicle Identi-

fication Number (VIN), codes for color and

upholstery, etc. The model plate is located

on the rear side of the B-pillar (the pillar

between the front and rear passenger

doors) and the rear passenger's door must

be open in order to see it.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Min-

istry of Transport (CMVSS) standards

(Canada): Your Volvo is designed to meet

all applicable safety standards, as evi-

denced by the certification label on the

driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-

ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of

the driver's door opening). For further infor-

mation regarding these regulations, please

consult your Volvo retailer.

Tire inflation pressures: This label indi-

cates the correct inflation pressures for the

tires that were on the vehicle when it left

the factory. Canadian models have the

upper decal; U.S. models have the lower

one.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN): The

VIN plate is located on the top left surface

of the dashboard. The VIN is also stamped

on the right hand door pillar.

Vehicle Emission Control Information:

Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-

cable emission standards, as evidenced by

the certification label on the underside of

the hood. For further information regarding

these regulations, please consult your

Volvo retailer.

11 Specifications

Dimensions

278

Position Dimension in. (cm)

A Wheelbase 112.6 in. (285.7 cm)

B Length 188.9 in. (479.8 cm)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 79.4 in. (201.8 cm)

D Load length, cargo area 44 in. (111.8 cm)

E Height 70.2 in. (178.4 cm)

F Load height 34.3 in. (87.2 cm)

G Track, front 64.3 in. (163.4 cm)

H Track, rear 63.9 (162.4 cm)

11 Specifications

Dimensions

279

Position Dimension in. (cm)

I Load width, floor 41.8 in. (106.4 cm)

J Width 74.7 in. (189.8 cm)

K Width incl. door mirrors 83.1 in. (211.2 cm)

11 Specifications

Weights

280

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weightA

7-seat, 6-cyl, FWDB

7-seat, 6-cyl, AWDC

7-seat, 8-cyl, AWD

5915 lbs

6080 lbs

6100 lbs

–

2760 kg

2770 kg

Capacity weight

7-seat models 1210 lbs 550 kg

Permissible axle weight, frontA

7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD

7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD

7-seat, 8-cyl, AWD

2770 lbs

2880 lbs

2930 lbs

–

1310 kg

1330 kg

Permissible axle weight, rearA

7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD

7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD

7-seat, 8-cyl, AWD

3170 lbs

3240 lbs

–

1470 kg

Curb weight

All models 4560 - 4800 lbs 2100 - 2150 kg

Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

Trailer weight, w/o brakes 1650 lbs 750 kg

11 Specifications

Weights

281

Category USA Canada

Trailer weights, with brakes See the table on page 158 See the table on page 158

Max. tongue weight See the table on page 158 See the table on page 158

APermissible axle weight or gross vehicle weight must never be exceeded.

BFront Wheel Drive

CAll Wheel Drive

CAUTION

The maximum permissible axle loads and/

or the gross vehicle weight must not be

exceeded.

WARNING

When adding accessories, equipment, lug-

gage and other cargo to your vehicle, the

total capacity weight must not be exceeded.

11 Specifications

Fluids

282 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Specifications and capacities

Category Specification

Fuel tank 21.1 US gals. (80 liters)

Octane rating: unleaded gasoline, minimum octane requirement AKI 87,

recommended rating AKI 91 or above (See also page 134)

Transmission oilA

TF-80SC

JWS 3309

7.4 US qts. (7.0 liters)

Miscellaneous

Power steering

Windshield washer reservoir

Brake fluid

Air conditioning system

Miscellaneous

1.1 US qts. (1.0 liters)

6.9 US qts. (6.5 liters)

0.63 US qts. (0.6 liters)

Front – 2.2 lb. (1 kg), Rear* 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg) R 134a (HFC134a)

Coolant

3.2 6-cyl.

Volvo original coolant/antifreeze (Thermostat begins to open at 194 ° F

(90 ° C)).

7.9 US qts. (7.5 liters)

10.7 US qts. (10.2 liters)

Brake fluid DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F (280 °C), P/N 9437433

Power steering fluid Volvo synthetic power steering fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S) P/N 1161529 or

equivalent 1.1 US quarts (1.0 liters)

11 Specifications

Fluids

283

Category Specification

Washer fluid reservoir Use washer fluid solvent in cold weather conditions 6.9 US quarts (6.5 lit-

ers)

Air conditioning system Refrigerant – R134aB

AThe transmission oil does not normally need to be changed during the service life of the vehicle. However, it may be necessary to replace the oil if the vehicle is often driven in areas of sustained

temperature extremes (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, for prolonged driving in mountainous areas, or if the vehicle is often driven short distances in temperatures under 40 °F

(5 °C).

BSee page 94 for volumes

11 Specifications

Suspension

284

Rear suspension

Individual rear wheel suspension with longitu-

dinal support arms, double link arms and track

rods.

Front suspension

Spring strut suspension with integrated shock

absorbers and control arms linked to the sup-

port frame. Power-assisted rack and pinion

steering. Safety type steering column.

11 Specifications

Engine oil

285

Oil specifications

Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC

specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.

Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel

economy, engine performance, or engine pro-

tection.

Volvo recommends Castrol.

Engine designation Volume between MIN-MAX on dipstick VolumeA

3.2 6-cyl. B6324S 1.27 US qts (1.2 liters) 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

V8 AWD B8444S 1.3 US qts (1.2 liters) 7.1 US qts. (6.7 liters)

AIncluding filter replacement.

11 Specifications

Engine specifications

286

Engine designation B6324S B8444S

Output

kW/rps 175/103 232/100

hp/rpm 235/6200 311/6000

Torque

Nm/rps 320/53 440/65

ft. lbs./rpm 235/3200 170/4400

No. of cylinders 6 8

Bore (mm/in.) 3.3/84 3.7/94

Stroke (mm/in.) 3.77/96 3.13/79.5

Cylinder displacement, liters 3.19 (194.7 cu in) 4.41 (268.6 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.4:1

Charge air cooler (Intercooler)

Turbocharged engines employ a turbo-com-

pressor to force air into the engine inlet mani-

fold and a charge air cooler to cool the com-

pressed inlet air. The resulting increase in air

flow raises pressure in the intake manifold and

increases engine power over that developed by

the normally-aspirated engine. The charge air

cooler (which resembles a radiator) is located

between the turbo-compressor and inlet mani-

fold.

Fuel system

The engine is equipped with a multiport fuel

injection system.

11 Specifications

Electrical system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 287

General information

12-volt system with voltage controlled gener-

ator. Single wire system in which the chassis

and engine block are used as conductors,

grounded on the chassis.

Battery

Battery 3.2 6-cyl. V8

Voltage 12 V 12 V

Cold start

capacity

(CCA)

520 A 600 A

Battery 3.2 6-cyl. V8

Reserve

capacity

(RC)

100 min 120 min

Capacity

(Ah)

60 70

If you must replace your battery, be sure to

replace it with a battery of the same cold start

capacity and reserve capacity as the original.

(See the decal on the battery).

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the state of California

to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

Bulbs

Bulb Type Socket

High beam H7 65W –

Low beam H11 55W –

Active Bending Lights - low beam* D1S 35W

Active Bending Lights - high beam* H9

65W

Front fog lights H1 55W

11 Specifications

Electrical system

288 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Bulb Type Socket

Front/rear parking lights, front/rear side marker

lights license plate light, rear footwell lighting

W5W W2,1x9,5d

Front turn signals H21W BAY9s

Rear fog light P21/4W BAY9s

Brake lights, backup lights P21W BA15s

Rear turn signals PY21W BA15s

Vanity mirror lighting 1.2W SV5.5

Front footwell lighting, cargo area lighting C5W SV8.5

WARNING

Active Bending Lights* - due to the high

voltage used by these headlights, these

bulbs should only be replaced by a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

11 Specifications

Three-way catalytic converter

289

Three-way catalytic converter -

general information

•Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain

engine malfunctions, particularly involving

the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition

systems, may cause unusually high three-

way catalytic converter temperatures. Do

not continue to operate your vehicle if you

detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of

power or other unusual operating condi-

tions, such as engine overheating or back-

firing. A properly tuned engine will help

avoid malfunctions that could damage the

three-way catalytic converter.

•Do not park your vehicle over combustible

materials, such as grass or leaves, which

can come into contact with the hot exhaust

system and cause such materials to ignite

under certain wind and weather condi-

tions.

•Excessive starter cranking (in excess of

one minute), or an intermittently firing or

flooded engine can cause three-way cata-

lytic converter or exhaust system over-

heating.

•Remember that tampering or unauthorized

modifications to the engine, the Electronic

Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille-

gal and can cause three-way catalytic con-

verter or exhaust system overheating. This

includes:

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with

three-way catalytic converters.

11 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

290

Introduction

The symbols in the vehicle's various displays

are divided into three main categories:

•Warning symbols

•Indicator symbols

•Information symbols

The following tables list the most common

symbols, their meaning and the pages in this

manual that provide more detailed information.

Warning/information symbol

This symbol ( ) lights up and glows red if

the condition is related to safety and/or driva-

bility or yellow to alert the driver to e.g., fill the

washer fluid reservoir, etc. In either case, a

message will be displayed in the instrument

panel display.

Symbols in the main instrument panel

Indicator and warning symbols

Symbol Description Page

Warning 59

Malfunction indi-

cator light

Symbol Description Page

Fault in the ABS

system

Rear fog light 60

Stability system

DSTC

Trailer turn signal

indicator

Parking brake

applied

SRS airbag sys-

tem

Symbol Description Page

Oil pressure warn-

ing light

Seat belt reminder 59

Generator warn-

ing light

Brake failure

warning light

High beam indica-

tor

11 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

291

Symbol Description Page

Left turn signal 58

Right turn signal 58

Other information symbols

Symbol Description Page

Cruise control 77

Information symbols in the center

console display

Symbol Description Page

Surround sound 248

HD radio 251

Audio files 262

CD folder 262

Symbol Description Page

Bluetooth-con-

nected cell phone

266

BluetoothTM

hands-free

266

Information symbols in the ceiling

console

Symbol Description Page

Seat belt reminder 56

Occupant weight

sensor

11 Specifications

Volvo programs

292

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON

CALL roadside assistance. Additional informa-

tion, features, and benefits are described in a

separate information package in your glove

compartment.

If you require assistance, dial:

In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-

VOLVO)

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-

ports certification by the National Institute for

Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi-

fied technicians have demonstrated a high

degree of competence in specific areas.

Besides passing exams, each technician must

also have worked in the field for two or more

years before a certificate is issued. These pro-

fessional technicians are best able to analyze

vehicle problems and perform the necessary

maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at

peak operating condition.

11 Specifications

293

12 Index

294

1, 2, 3 ...

12-volt sockets.......................................... 79

A/C (air conditioning)........................... 98, 99

ABS.......................................................... 149

Accessory installation warning.................. 15

Airbag system............................................ 23

Air cleaner................................................ 213

Air conditioning.......................................... 94

Air distribution...................................... 96, 99

Air quality sensor....................................... 98

Air vents..................................................... 96

Alarm........................................................ 131

All Wheel Drive......................................... 148

All Wheel Drive – towing.......................... 157

Anti-lock brake system

warning light......................................... 60

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 149

Ashtray..................................................... 114

Audio

system introduction............................ 244

Audio system

HD digital radio................................... 251

Rear seat entertainment..................... 270

Sirius satellite radio............................ 255

AUTO (climate control)....................... 99, 100

Automatic transmission........................... 144

Autostart.......................................... 139, 141

AUX (audio system)................................. 259

Average speed........................................... 75

AWD......................................................... 148

Bass......................................................... 247

Battery..................................................... 211

maintenance....................................... 220

specifications...................................... 287

Battery – replacing................................... 221

Belt check................................................ 212

Black box................................................... 13

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 165

Blower (fan).............................................. 100

Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 265

Booster cushion

accessory............................................. 46

integrated.............................................. 51

Brake fluid................................................ 218

Brake system........................................... 149

Bulbs........................................................ 223

Bulbs, replacing....................................... 223

Capacities, fluids..................................... 282

Capacity weight....................................... 182

Cargo area cover..................................... 121

Cargo grid................................................ 120

Cargo net................................................. 118

Catalytic converter, three-way................. 289

CD Pause................................................. 261

Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 265

Center console buttons............................. 64

Central locking system - remote key....... 125

Changing a wheel.................................... 193

Changing coolant.................................... 212

12 Index

295

Charge air cooler..................................... 286

Check Engine warning light....................... 61

Child restraint anchors......................... 47, 49

Child restraints

recalls and registration......................... 50

Child restraint systems.............................. 39

Child safety................................................ 37

Child safety locks.................................... 130

Climate system.......................................... 94

refrigerant............................................. 94

Clock reset button..................................... 58

Coat hanger............................................. 116

Cold weather precautions........................ 163

Compact disc care

CD care............................................... 263

Convertible seats....................................... 43

Coolant.................................................... 217

changing............................................. 212

Courtesy light........................................... 111

Cup holder

rear seat.............................................. 115

Curb weight............................................. 182

Current fuel consumption.......................... 75

Defroster

rear window and door mirrors.............. 74

rear window and mirrors..................... 100

windshield............................................. 99

Detachable trailer hitch............................ 161

Dimensions.............................................. 278

Disabling the passenger's side front air-

bag............................................................. 28

Display, instrument panel.......................... 58

Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II)........................ 247

Door mirrors............................................... 84

defroster............................................... 74

Door mirrors, folding.................................. 64

Driver distraction warning.......................... 15

Driving conditions, difficult...................... 143

Driving economically................................ 142

Driving through water.............................. 143

Economical driving.................................. 142

Electrically operated moonroof.................. 86

Electrical system...................................... 287

Emission inspection readiness................ 209

Engine

specifications...................................... 286

starting................................................ 139

Engine oil................................................. 214

checking............................................. 215

specifications...................................... 285

Environment............................................... 14

Federal Clean Air Act............................... 208

Flat tires

changing............................................. 191

repairing with tire sealing system....... 186

Fog light..................................................... 60

Fog lights

front*..................................................... 68

Folding door mirrors.................................. 64

Front airbags.................................. 24, 25, 28

Front seat

folding backrest.................................. 104

manually adjusted............................... 104

12 Index

296

Front seats

power.................................................. 105

ventilated.............................................. 97

XC90 Executive.................................. 107

Front suspension..................................... 284

Fuel.......................................................... 134

Fuel filler cap........................................... 137

Fuel filler door

opening manually............................... 137

unlocking.............................................. 68

Fuel system.............................................. 286

Fuses....................................................... 230

Gasoline................................................... 134

Geartronic – manual shifting.................... 145

Generator................................................. 287

Generator warning light............................. 60

Glove compartment................................. 115

Grocery bag holder.................................. 121

Gross vehicle weight (GVW).................... 182

Hand brake.............................................. 151

Hazard warning flashers............................ 74

HD digital radio........................................ 251

Headlights.................................................. 67

Active Bending Lights............. 64, 68, 223

Dual Xenon........................................... 64

Headlights, high and low beams............... 70

Heated front seats..................................... 99

High/low beams – replacing.................... 223

High beam bulb, replacing...................... 228

High beam flash......................................... 70

High beam indicator.................................. 58

Hoisting the vehicle................................. 211

Home safe lighting..................................... 70

Hood, opening/closing.............................. 80

Ignition switch.......................................... 141

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...................... 124

Important information................................ 10

Indicator and warning symbols.................. 58

indicator light............................................. 60

Infant seats................................................ 41

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 33

Inflation pressure, checking..................... 175

Inflation pressure table

Canadian models................................ 178

Information and warning symbols, table

of.............................................................. 290

Information display.................................... 58

Inspection readiness................................ 209

Instrument overview.................................. 56

Instrument panel........................................ 58

Instrument panel lighting........................... 68

Interior lighting......................................... 111

ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 47

Jack......................................................... 191

12 Index

297

Key (ignition switch) positions................. 141

Keys......................................................... 124

Label information..................................... 276

Lighting panel............................................ 67

Load carriers............................................ 162

Locking steering wheel............................ 141

Locking the car........................................ 128

Locks, child safety................................... 130

Long distance trips.................................. 163

Low beam headlight.................................. 70

Maintenance............................................ 208

Maintenance, periodic............................. 209

Malfunction indicator light......................... 61

Mirrors

door, folding......................................... 64

power door........................................... 84

rearview, auto-dim function.................. 83

Moonroof................................................... 86

Motor oil

checking............................................. 215

MP3 player, connecting........................... 259

Multifilter with air quality sensor................ 98

OBD II...................................................... 209

Occupant safety........................................ 18

Oil

checking............................................. 215

Oil quality................................................. 214

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)...... 209

On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 292

Owner maintenance................................. 209

Paint - color code.................................... 204

Panel lighting, instrument.......................... 68

Park assist....................................... 154, 155

Parking brake........................................... 151

warning symbol.................................... 60

Parking lights............................................. 67

Passenger’s side front airbag, disabling. . . 28

Periodic owner-performed maintenance. 209

Permissible axle weight........................... 182

Polishing.................................................. 201

Power moonroof........................................ 86

Power seat............................................... 105

Power steering fluid................................. 218

Radiator................................................... 213

Radio

Sirius satellite radio............................ 255

Radio functions........................................ 246

HD digital radio................................... 251

Rain sensor - windshield wipers................ 72

12 Index

298

Rear seat entertainment.......................... 270

Rear suspension...................................... 284

Rearview mirror with compass.................. 83

Rear window defroster.............................. 74

Recalls, child restraints.............................. 50

Recirculation.............................................. 99

REDUCE SPEED........................................ 62

Refrigerant (A/C system)............................ 94

Refrigerator (XC90 Executive).................. 117

Registering child restraints........................ 50

Remote key.............................................. 125

replacing the battery........................... 127

Reporting safety defects

Canada................................................. 19

USA....................................................... 18

Safety defects, reporting

Canada................................................. 19

USA....................................................... 18

Safety locks, child.................................... 130

Seat belt..................................................... 20

Seats........................................................ 104

Shiftlock................................................... 139

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags....... 31

Sirius satellite radio.................................. 255

Snow chains............................................ 184

Snow tires................................................ 184

Spare tire................................................. 185

Spare tire – accessing............................. 191

Spare wheel, lowering............................. 191

Speedometer............................................. 58

Starting the car........................................ 139

Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...................... 124

Steering wheel lock................................. 141

Stone chips, touching up......................... 204

Storage compartments............ 113, 115, 116

Studded tires........................................... 184

Sun visor.................................................... 87

Symbols, overview................................... 290

Tachometer................................................ 58

Tailgate

locking/unlocking................................ 128

opening................................................. 80

Tailgate wipers......................................... 219

Technician certification............................ 292

Temperature control................................ 100

Temperature gauge................................... 58

Temporary spare tire............................... 185

Three-way catalytic converter................. 289

TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE................. 62

Tire inflation pressure table

Canadian models................................ 178

US models.......................................... 177

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 195

Tires......................................................... 172

age...................................................... 172

changing............................................. 191

changing from summer to winter........ 173

designations....................................... 179

improving economy............................ 172

inflation............................................... 175

inflation pressure, checking................ 175

12 Index

299

inflation pressure tables..................... 177

load ratings......................................... 176

rotation............................................... 173

spare................................................... 185

speed ratings...................................... 176

storing................................................. 173

tire sealing system.............................. 186

tread wear indicator............................ 174

Tire sealing system.................................. 186

Towing a trailer........................................ 158

V8-engine........................................... 160

Towing - cars with All Wheel Drive.......... 157

Towing the vehicle................................... 156

Trailer hitch - detachable......................... 161

Trailer towing................................... 158, 160

Transmission, automatic.......................... 144

Tread wear indicator................................ 174

Treble....................................................... 247

Trip computer............................................ 75

Trip odometer............................................ 58

Turn signals............................................... 70

Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 183

Unlocking fuel filler door............................ 68

Unlocking the car..................................... 128

Unpaved roads, driving on...................... 143

V8 engine and trailer towing.................... 160

Vanity mirror............................................ 112

Vehicle dimensions.................................. 278

Vehicle Event Data..................................... 13

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)......... 277

Vehicle loading........................................ 182

Vehicle maintenance................................ 208

Vehicle weights........................................ 280

Ventilated seats......................................... 97

Volvo and the environment........................ 14

Volvo maintenance.................................. 208

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 292

Warning symbol......................................... 58

Warning symbol in center of dashboard.... 58

Warranties................................................ 208

Washer fluid reservoir...................... 213, 217

Washing the vehicle................................. 200

Water, driving through............................. 143

Waxing..................................................... 201

Weights.................................................... 280

Wheels..................................................... 172

storing................................................. 173

Windshield

IR coating............................................. 73

Windshield washer fluid reservoir............ 217

Windshield wipers.................................... 219

Winter/Wet driving mode......................... 163

Wipers...................................................... 219

W – Winter............................................... 145

12 Index

300

Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&&-'+JH68VcVYV!6I&%'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<iZWdg\'%&%!8deng^\]i©'%%%"'%&%Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc

Volvo Xc90 Users Manual

2011 XC90 Owner's Manual 2011-Volvo-XC90-Owners-Manual 2011 Volvo XC90 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

XC90 to the manual 6290425e-4875-4c82-ba1c-8427fcb11f78

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation